©2003 All rights reserved.
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA
6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.
135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.
SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.
RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.
YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.
J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.
17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
HTR-5790
AV Receiver
OWNER'S MANUAL
U
Printed in Malaysia WC85700
HTR-5790U-cv.fm Page 1 Tuesday, November 18, 2003 11:12 AM
• Explanation of Graphical Symbols
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within
the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to
persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle
is intended to alert you to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in
the literature accompanying the appliance.
1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions
should be read before the product is operated.
2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions
should be retained for future reference.
3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the
operating instructions should be adhered to.
4 Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions
should be followed.
5 Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before
cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use
a damp cloth for cleaning.
6 Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by
the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.
7 Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water –
for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or
laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool;
and the like.
8 Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart,
stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall,
causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious
damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,
bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold
with the product. Any mounting of the product should
follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a
mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.
9 A product and cart combination should be moved with care.
Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven
surfaces may cause the product and cart
combination to overturn.
10 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided
for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the
product and to protect it from overheating, and these
openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings
should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,
sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not
be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack
unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s
instructions have been adhered to.
11 Power Sources – This product should be operated only from
the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If
you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home,
consult your product dealer or local power company. For
products intended to operate from battery power, or other
sources, refer to the operating instructions.
12 Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped
with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having
one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the
power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you
are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try
reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact
your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not
defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.
13 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be
routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched
by items placed upon or against them, paying particular
attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the
point where they exit from the product.
14 Lightning – For added protection for this product during a
lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for
long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and
disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent
damage to the product due to lightning and power-line
surges.
15 Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be
located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other
electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such
power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna
system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching
such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be
fatal.
16 Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension
cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result
in a risk of fire or electric shock.
17 Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind
into this product through openings as they may touch
dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result
in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on
the product.
18 Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself
as opening or removing covers may expose you to
dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
19 Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the
wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel
under the following conditions:
a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,
b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the
product,
c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water,
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
i
CAUTION
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 2 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
3
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING
MAST
GROUND
CLAMP
ANTENNA
LEAD IN
WIRE
ANTENNA
DISCHARGE UNIT
(NEC SECTION 810–20)
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
(NEC SECTION 810–21)
GROUND CLAMPS
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING
ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250. PART H)
ELECTRIC
SERVICE
EQUIPMENT
NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
d) If the product does not operate normally by following
the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls
that are covered by the operating instructions as an
improper adjustment of other controls may result in
damage and will often require extensive work by a
qualified technician to restore the product to its normal
operation,
e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any
way, and
f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in perfor-
mance - this indicates a need for service.
20 Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required,
be sure the service technician has used replacement parts
specified by the manufacturer or have the same
characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized
substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other
hazards.
21 Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to
this product, ask the service technician to perform safety
checks to determine that the product is in proper operating
condition.
22 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted
to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the
manufacturer.
23 Heat – The product should be situated away from heat
sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other
products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or
cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna
or cable system is grounded so as to provide some
protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.
Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70,
provides information with regard to proper grounding of the
mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire
to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors,
location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding
electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.
Note to CATV system installer:
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s
attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides
guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies
that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding
system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as
practical.
FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)
ii
1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS
UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the
instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC
requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by
Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to
use the product.
2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to
accessories and/or another product use only high quality
shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST
be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to
follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to
use this product in the USA.
3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply
with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15
for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these
requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that
your use of this product in a residential environment will
not result in harmful interference with other electronic
devices.
This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if
not installed and used according to the instructions found
in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the
operation of other electronic devices.
Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that
interference will not occur in all installations. If this
product is found to be the source of interference, which
can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”,
please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the
following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being
affected by the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit
breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient
the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,
change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory
results, please contact the local retailer authorized to
distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the
appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics
Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA
90620.
The above statements apply ONLY to those products
distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its
subsidiaries.
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 3 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
4
1 To assure the finest performance, please read this
manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future
reference.
2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool,
dry, clean place — away from direct sunlight, heat
sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold.
Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top,
20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of
this unit.
3 Locate this unit away from other electrical
appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid
humming sounds.
4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature
changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit
in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with
a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this
unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire,
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may
fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to
liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit,
do not place:
– Other components, as they may cause damage
and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit.
– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause
fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall
and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user
and/or damage to this unit.
6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth,
curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If
the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause
fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all
connections are complete.
8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may
overheat, possibly causing damage.
9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall
outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this
might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used.
Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified
is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this
unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be
held responsible for any damage resulting from use
of this unit with a voltage other than specified.
13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the
power cord from the wall outlet during an electrical
storm.
14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact
qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any
service is needed. The cabinet should never be
opened for any reasons.
15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods
of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug
from the wall outlet.
16 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section
on common operating errors before concluding that
this unit is faulty.
17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set
this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the
AC power plug from the wall outlet.
18 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models
only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this
unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE
plugging into the AC main supply.
Voltages are 110/120/220/230-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.
We Want You Listening For A Lifetime
YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association's Consumer
Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your
equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound
come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or
distortion - and, most importantly, without affecting your
sensitive hearing.
Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often
undetectable until it is too late, YA M A H A and the
Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer
Electronics Group recommend you to avoid
prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN
OR MOISTURE.
This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as
long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself
is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this
state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of
power.
FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS
To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to
wide slot and fully insert.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian
ICES-003.
IMPORTANT
Please record the serial number of this unit in the space
below.
MODEL:
Serial No.:
The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.
Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future
reference.
iii
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 4 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
1
PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION
BASIC
OPERATION
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
CONTENTS ............................................................ 1
FEATURES............................................................. 2
GETTING STARTED............................................ 3
Supplied accessories .................................................. 3
Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 3
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4
Front panel ................................................................. 4
Remote control........................................................... 6
Using the remote control ........................................... 7
Front panel display .................................................... 8
Rear panel ................................................................ 10
SPEAKER SETUP ............................................... 11
Speaker placement ................................................... 11
Speaker connections ................................................ 12
CONNECTIONS .................................................. 15
Before connecting components................................ 15
Connecting video components................................. 16
Connecting audio components................................. 19
Connecting the antennas.......................................... 21
Connecting the power supply cord .......................... 22
Speaker impedance setting ...................................... 23
Turning on the power............................................... 23
AUTO SETUP....................................................... 24
Introduction.............................................................. 24
Optimizer microphone setup.................................... 24
Starting the setup ..................................................... 25
BASIC SETUP...................................................... 28
Using BASIC setup.................................................. 28
PLAYBACK.......................................................... 30
Basic operations....................................................... 30
Selecting sound field programs ............................... 32
Selecting input modes.............................................. 34
TUNING ................................................................ 36
Automatic and manual tuning.................................. 36
Presetting stations .................................................... 37
Selecting preset stations........................................... 39
Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 39
RECORDING ....................................................... 40
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM
DESCRIPTIONS...............................................41
For movie/video sources.......................................... 41
For music sources .................................................... 43
ADVANCED OPERATIONS ..............................44
Selecting the OSD mode.......................................... 44
Using the sleep timer ............................................... 44
Manually adjusting speaker levels........................... 45
Using the test tone ................................................... 46
SET MENU ............................................................47
Using SET MENU................................................... 48
Manual setup: SOUND............................................ 49
Manual setup: INPUT.............................................. 54
Manual setup: OPTION........................................... 56
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................59
Control area ............................................................. 59
Setting manufacturer codes...................................... 60
Programming codes from other remote controls ..... 61
Changing source names in the display window....... 62
Clearing function sets .............................................. 63
Clearing individual functions .................................. 63
Controlling each component.................................... 64
ZONE 2/ZONE 3
(U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only)..68
Zone 2/Zone 3 connections...................................... 68
Remote controlling Zone 2/Zone 3.......................... 69
EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS ......71
What is a sound field ............................................... 71
Changing parameter settings ................................... 71
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER
DESCRIPTIONS...............................................73
TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................77
GLOSSARY...........................................................82
SPECIFICATIONS...............................................85
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERATION
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
ADVANCED OPERATION
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 1 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
FEATURES
2
Built-in 7-channel power amplifier
◆ Minimum RMS output power
(0.04% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz, 8Ω)
Front: 110 W + 110 W
Center: 110 W
Surround: 110 W + 110 W
Surround Back: 110 W + 110 W
Sound field features
◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of
sound fields
◆ THX
◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder
◆ DTS/DTS ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS
Neo:6 decoder, DTS 96/24
◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic
IIx Decoder
◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP
◆ SILENT CINEMA
™
Sophisticated AM/FM tuner
◆ 40-station random access preset tuning
◆ Automatic preset tuning
◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing)
Other features
◆ YPAO: YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic
Optimizer for automatic speaker setup
◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter
◆ “SET MENU” which provides you with items for
optimizing this unit for your audio/video system
◆ 6 or 8-channel external decoder input for other future
formats
◆ On Screen Display function helpful in controlling this
unit
◆ S Video signal input/output capability
◆ Component video input/output capability
◆ Video signal conversion (composite video ↔
S Video → component video) capability for monitor
out
◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks
◆ Sleep timer
◆ Night listening mode
◆ Remote control with preset manufacturer codes
◆ Zone 2/Zone 3 custom installation facility (U.S.A.,
Canada and Australia models only)
• y indicates a tip for your operation.
• Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button
names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses.
• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In
case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX”, and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
SILENT CINEMA is a trademark of YAMAHA
CORPORATION.
“DTS” and “DTS-ES Digital Surround” and “Neo:6” are
trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
THX and the THX logo are registered trademarks of THX Ltd.
Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and
Dolby Laboratories, Inc. and is a trademark of Dolby
Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved. Used under authorization.
FEATURES
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 2 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
GETTING STARTED
3
INTRODUCTION
Please check that you received all of the following parts.
1 Press the part and slide the battery
compartment cover off.
2 Insert four supplied batteries (AAA, R03, UM-
4) according to the polarity markings on the
inside of the battery compartment.
3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place.
Notes on batteries
• Change all of the batteries if you notice the condition like; the
operation range of the remote control decreases, the indicator
does not flash or its light becomes dim.
• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.
• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and
manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as
these different types of batteries may have the same shape and
color.
• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately.
Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into
contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment
thoroughly before installing new batteries.
GETTING STARTED
Supplied accessories
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
INPUT MODE
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
DTV
POWER
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
AUDI O
VOL
LEVEL
MENU
STRAIGHT
STEREO
ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR
NIGHT
EX/ES
MOVIE
THX /DTS
TEST
ON SCREEN
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
HALL
CHCH
JAZZ
ROCK
TITLE
MUTE
POWER
AMP
AVTV
DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
+
+
+
–
–
–
3421
5
90
+10 ENTER
67 8
Remote control
Batteries (4)
(AAA, R03, UM-4)
Indoor FM antenna
(U.S.A., Canada, China,
Korea, Asia and General
models)
AM loop antenna
Optimizer microphone*
75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter
(U.K. model only)
Speaker terminal wrench
Power Cord
(U.S.A., Canada and Europe models)
(U.K., Europe and
Australia models)
*
The optimizer microphone is
sensitive to heat.
– Keep it away from direct
sunlight.
– Do not place it on top of this unit.
Installing batteries in the remote
control
1
3
2
If the remote control is without batteries for more than
3 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the
remote control, the contents of the memory may be
cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new
batteries, set up the manufacturer code and program
any acquired functions that may have been cleared.
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 3 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
4
1 STANDBY/ON
Turns on this unit or sets it to the standby mode. When
you turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will
be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce
sound.
In standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in
order to receive infrared-signals from the remote control.
2 Remote control sensor
Receives signals from the remote control.
3 Front panel display
Shows information about the operational status of this
unit.
4 PRESET/TUNING EDIT
Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h
between selecting preset station numbers and tuning.
5 FM/AM
Switches the reception band between FM and AM.
6 A/B/C/D/E
Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E).
7 PRESET/TUNING l / h
Selects preset station number 1 to 8 when the colon (:) is
displayed next to the band indication in the front panel
display.
Selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) is not
displayed.
8 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)
Stores a station in the memory. Hold down this button for
more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning.
9 TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)
Switches the tuning mode between automatic (“AUTO”
indicator on) and manual (“AUTO” indicator off).
0 VOLUME
Controls the output level of all audio channels.
This does not affect the REC OUT level.
A OPTIMIZER MIC jack
Use to connect and input audio signals from the supplied
microphone for use with the AUTO SETUP function (see
page 24).
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Front panel
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
FM/AM
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/TUNING
INPUT MODE
TONE CONTROL
MULTI CH
INPUT
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
VOLUME
PROGRAM INPUT
STANDBY
/ON
OPTIMIZER
MIC
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
SPEAKERS
A B
OPTICALRAUDI OL
VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO AUX
(U.S.A. model)
Note
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 4 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
5
INTRODUCTION
B PHONES (SILENT CINEMA)
Outputs audio signals for private listening with
headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals
are output to the OUTPUT jacks or to the speakers.
All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down
to the left and right headphone channels.
C SPEAKERS A/B
Turn on or off the set of front speakers connected to the A
and/or B terminals on the rear panel at each time the
corresponding button is pressed.
D STRAIGHT/EFFECT
Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is
selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are
output directly from their respective speakers without
effect processing.
E PROGRAM
Use to select sound field programs or adjust bass/treble
balance (in conjunction with TONE CONTROL).
F TONE CONTROL
Use to adjust the bass/treble balance for the front left/right
and center channels (see page 31).
G INPUT MODE
Sets the priority (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) for the type of
signals received when one component is connected to two
or more of this unit’s input jacks (see page 34). Priority
cannot be set when MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the
input source.
H INPUT selector
Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch.
I MULTI CH INPUT
Selects the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks. When selected, the MULTI CH INPUT source
takes priority over the source selected with INPUT (or the
input selector buttons on the remote control).
J VIDEO AUX jacks
Input audio and video signals from a portable external
source such as a game console. To reproduce source
signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input
source.
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 5 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
6
This section describes the function of each control on the
remote control. See “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES”
on page 59 to operate other components with this remote
control.
1 Infrared window
Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the
component you want to operate.
2 TRANSMIT indicator
Flashes while the remote control is sending signals.
3 STANDBY
Sets this unit in the standby mode.
4 SYSTEM POWER
Turns on the power of this unit.
5 Input selector buttons
Select the input source and change the control area.
6 Display window
Shows the name of the selected source component that
you can control.
7 LEVEL
Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted and sets the
level.
8 Cursor buttons u / d / j / i
Use to select and adjust DSP program parameters or SET
MENU items.
9 TEST
Outputs the test tone to adjust the speaker levels.
0 Sound field program/Numeric buttons
Use to select sound field programs or input numbers.
A RE-NAME
Used for changing the input source name in the display
window (see page 62).
B CLEAR
Used for clearing functions acquired when using the learn
and rename features, or setting manufacturer codes (see
page 63).
C LEARN
Used for setting up the manufacturer code or for
programming functions from other remote controls (see
pages 60 and 61).
D SLEEP
Sets the sleep timer.
E INPUT MODE
Sets the priority (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) for the type of
signals received when one component is connected to two
or more of this unit’s input jacks (see page 34). Priority
cannot be set when MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the
input source.
F MULTI CH IN
Selects the MULTI CH INPUT mode when using an
external decoder (etc.).
G SELECT k/n
Selects another component that you can control
independently of the input component selected with the
input selector buttons.
H AMP
Selects AMP or other component selected by the input
selector button.
Remote control
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
INPUT MODE
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
DTV
POWER
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
VOL
LEVEL
MENU
STRAIGHT
STEREO
ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR
NIGHT
EX/ES
MOVIE
THX /DTS
TEST
ON SCREEN
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
HALL
CHCH
JAZZ
ROCK
TITLE
MUTE
POWER
AMP
AVTV
DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
+
+
+
–
–
–
3421
5
90
+10 ENTER
67 8
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 6 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
7
INTRODUCTION
I VOL –/+
Increases or decreases the volume level.
J MUTE
Mutes the sound. The MUTE indicator turns on when the
MUTE function is on. Press again to restore the audio
output to the previous volume level.
K SET MENU
Selects the SET MENU mode.
L ON SCREEN
Selects the on-screen display (OSD) mode for your video
monitor.
M STRAIGHT/EFFECT
Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is
selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are
output directly from their respective speakers without
effect processing.
N EX/ES
Switches between 5.1 or 6.1/7.1 channel playback of
multi-channel software.
The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam.
Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote
control sensor on the main unit during operation.
■ Handling the remote control
• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote
control.
• Do not drop the remote control.
• Do not leave or store the remote control in the
following types of conditions:
– high humidity such as near a bath
– high temperature such as near a heater or stove
– extremely low temperature
– dusty places
Using the remote control
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
FM/AM
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/TUNING
INPUT MODE
TONE CONTROL
MULTI CH
INPUT
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
VOLUME
PROGRAM INPUT
STANDBY
/ON
OPTIMIZER
MIC
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
SPEAKERS
A B
OPTICALRAUDIOL
VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO AUX
30 30
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
CLEAR
LEARN
POWER SLEEP
STANDBY
INPUT MODE
SYSTEM
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
SELECT
POWER
TV
POWER
AV
AMP
REC
DISC SKIP
AUDIO
VOL
LEVEL
TITLE
TV INPUT
TV VOL
SET MENU
MENU
A/B/C/D/E
MUTE
CH
TV MUTE
SELECT
CH
PRESET PRESET
TEST
RETURN
TV VOL
ON SCREEN
DISPLAY
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
STEREO
HALL
JAZZ
ROCK
12
34
56
8
ENTERTAIN
MUSIC
TV THTR
MOVIE
7
90
ENTER
+10
EX/ES
THX /DTS
NIGHT
CHP/INDEX
Approximately 6 m (20 ft)
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 7 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
8
1 Decoder indicators
When any of this unit’s decoders function, the respective
indicator lights up.
2 Sound field indicators
Light to indicate the active DSP sound fields.
3 Input source indicators
A cursor lights to show the current input source.
4 CINEMA DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field
program.
5 OPTIMIZER indicator
Lights up during the auto setup procedure and when the
auto setup speaker settings are used without any
modifications.
6 STEREO indicator
Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an
FM stereo broadcast while the “AUTO” indicator is lit.
7 AUTO indicator
Shows that this unit is in the automatic tuning mode.
8 MUTE indicator
Lights up while the MUTE function is on.
9 VOLUME level indicators
Indicate the volume level.
0 THX indicator
Lights up when a THX program is selected.
A PCM indicator
Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code
modulation) digital audio signals.
B Headphones indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected.
C SP A B indicators
Light up according to the set of front speakers selected.
Both indicators light up when both sets of speakers are
selected, or when bi-wiring.
D SILENT CINEMA indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound
field program is selected (see page 31).
E NIGHT indicator
Lights up when you select night listening mode.
F VIRTUAL indicator
Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see
page 34).
G SLEEP indicator
Lights up while the sleep timer is on.
H Multi-information display
Shows the current sound field program name and other
information when adjusting or changing settings.
I HiFi DSP
Lights when you select a HiFi DSP sound field program.
Front panel display
V–AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
PHONO
96
24
VIRTUAL
ZONE2
ZONE3
OPTIMIZER
HiFi DSP
PS PTY
RT CT
EON
PTY
HOLD
STEREO
TUNED
AUTO
MEMORY
MUTE
VOLUME
SLEEP
DIGITAL
PL
PL
MATRIX
DISCRETE
PCMTHX
EX
NIGHT
SILENT
A B
SP
LFE
ft
mS
dB
96/24
LL C R
SL SB SR
(U.S.A., Canada and
Australia models only)
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Presence DSP sound field
Listening position
Left surround
DSP sound field
Right surround
DSP sound field
Surround back DSP sound field
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 8 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
9
INTRODUCTION
J TUNED indicator
Lights up when this unit is tuned in to a station.
K MEMORY indicator
Flashes to show a station can be stored.
L 96/24 indicator
Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.
M LFE indicator
Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE signal.
N Input channel indicators
Indicate the channel components of current digital input
signal.
O Presence and surround back speaker
indicators
Indicate the connection of presence and/or surround back
speakers when using the SPEAKERS setting (page 29) or
SP LEVEL setting (page 50).
P ZONE 2/ZONE 3 indicators
(U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only)
Light up while Zone 2 or Zone 3 signal is output.
Q RDS indicators
(U.K. and Europe models only)
The name(s) of the RDS data offered by the currently
received RDS station light(s) up.
EON lights up when an RDS station that offers the EON
data service is being received.
PTY HOLD lights up while searching for stations in the
PTY SEEK mode.
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 9 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
10
1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks
See page 19 for details.
2 Audio component jacks
See page 19 for connection information.
3 Video component jacks
See pages 16 and 18 for connection information.
4 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
(U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only)
See page 69 for details.
5 CONTROL OUT jack
(U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only)
This is control expansion terminal for commercial use.
6 AC OUTLET(S)
Use to supply power to your other A/V components (see
page 22).
7 AC INLET (U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Use this inlet to plug in the supplied power cable (see
page 22).
8 DIGITAL INPUT jacks
See pages 16, 18 and 19 for details.
9 MULTI CH INPUT jacks
See page 17 for connection information.
0 ZONE 2 / ZONE 3 OUTPUT jacks
(U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only)
See page 68 for details.
A Antenna terminals
See page 21 for connection information.
B PRE OUT jacks
See page 20 for connection information.
C Speaker terminals
See page 12 for connection information.
D PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals
(U.S.A., Canada and Australia models)
PRESENCE speaker terminals
(other models)
See page 12 for connection information.
< Asia and General models only >
FREQUENCY STEP switch
See page 21.
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
See page 22.
Rear panel
AC OUTLETS
AC OUTLETS
GND
SPEAKERS
FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT
CENTER
PRE OUT
SUB
WOOFER
SURROUND BACK
/PRESENCE
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
CENTER
R
R
R
L
R
L
R
L
L
R
R
L
L
L
CENTER
SUB
WOOFER
MONITOR OUT
MULTI CH INPUT OUTPUT
AUDIO AUDIO VIDEO
S VIDEO
DVD
DTV
CBL
/SAT
VIDEO
R
L
R
L
IN
(
PLAY
)
IN
(
PLAY
)
OUT
(
REC
)
OUT
(
REC
)
CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD
PHONO
IN
OUT
OUT
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
DVR/
VCR 2
VCR 1
CD-R
IN
FRONT (6CH)/SB (8CH)
SURROUND
TUNER
AM
ANT
GND
FM ANT
75Ω
UNBAL.
COMPONENT VIDEO
P
R
DVD
MONITOR OUT
DTV
P
B
Y
DIGITAL OUTPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
OPTICAL
MD
/
TAP E
CD-R
DVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
CD
CD
DVD
DVR/
VCR 2
COAXIAL
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
+
––
–
+
+
+
+
+
–
–
–
–
A
B
PRESENCE/ ZONE 2
CONTROL OUTREMOTE
IN OUT
+12V 15mA MAX.
SINGLE
(U.S.A. model)
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 10 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
SPEAKER SETUP
11
PREPARATION
+
y
The speaker layout above shows the standard ITU-R speaker
setting. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP, multi-channel
audio sources and THX.
Front speakers (FR and FL)
The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus
effect sounds. Place these speakers an equal distance from
the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker
from each side of the video monitor should be the same.
Center speaker (C)
The center speaker is for the center channel sounds
(dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical
to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results,
however, are obtained with the full system. Align the front
face of the center speaker with the front face of your video
monitor. Place the speaker centrally between the front
speakers and as close to the monitor as possible, such as
directly over or under it.
Surround speakers (SR and SL)
The surround speakers are used for effect and surround
sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening
position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above
the floor.
Surround back speakers (SBR and SBL)
The surround back speakers supplement the surround
speakers and provide for more realistic front-to-back
transitions. Place these speakers directly behind the
listening position and at the same height as the surround
speakers. They should be positioned at least 30 cm (12 in)
apart. Ideally, they should be positioned at the same width
as the front speakers.
Subwoofer
The use of a subwoofer, such as the YAMAHA Active
Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only
for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels,
but also for high fidelity reproduction of the LFE (low-
frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and
DTS software. The position of the subwoofer is not so
critical, because low bass sounds are not highly
directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the
front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the
room to reduce wall reflections.
Presence speakers (PR and PL)
Presence speakers supplement the sound from the front
speakers with extra ambient effects produced by
CINEMA DSP (see page 41). These effects include
sounds that filmmakers intend to locate a little farther
back behind the screen in order to create more theater-like
ambience. Place these speakers at the front of the room
about 0.5 - 1 m (1 - 3 ft) outside the front speakers, facing
slightly inwards, and about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor.
■ Di-pole speaker layout
Either di-pole or direct radiating speaker types can be used
for THX surround. If you choose di-pole speakers, please
place the surround and surround back speakers according
to the speaker layout below.
SPEAKER SETUP
Speaker placement
60˚
30˚
PL
PR
SBR
SBL
FL
FR
C
SL
SR
SR
80˚
SL
more than 30 cm
(12 inches)
1.8 m (6 ft)
1.8 m (6 ft)
FL
SR
SL
FR
C
SBR
SBL
30˚ 30˚
: Di-pole speaker
: Direction of di-pole speaker
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 11 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
12
SPEAKER SETUP
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R),
“+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are
faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the
polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound
will be unnatural and lack bass.
• If you will use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set this unit’s
speaker impedance setting to 6 ohms before using (see
page 23).
• Before connecting the speakers, make sure that the
power of this unit is off.
• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or
do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This
could damage this unit and/or speakers.
• Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of
speakers still creates the interference with the monitor,
place the speakers away from the monitor.
A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables
running side by side. One cable is colored or shaped
differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridges.
Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red)
terminals on this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain
cable to the “–” (black) terminals.
1 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8") of
insulation from the end of each speaker
cables.
2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together
to prevent short circuits.
3 Unscrew the knob.
y
Supplied speaker terminal wrench is useful to screw or
unscrew knobs.
4 Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side
of each terminal.
5 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.
Connecting to PRESENCE/ZONE 2 or PRESENCE
speaker terminals
1 Open the tab.
2 Insert one bare wire into
the hole of each terminal.
3 Return the tab to secure
the wire.
Banana plug connections
(With the exception of U.K., Europe and Asia models)
First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug
connector into the end of the corresponding terminal.
Speaker connections
CAUTION
10 mm (3/8")
1
2
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
5
4
3
2
1
3
Banana plug
(With the exception of U.K., Europe
and Asia models)
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 12 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
13
SPEAKER SETUP
PREPARATION
AC OUTLETS
AC OUTLETS
SPEAKERS
FRONT
CENTER
PRE OUT
SUB
WOOFER
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
R
R
L
R
R
L
L
L
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
+
––
–
+
+
+
+
+
–
–
–
–
A
B
SINGLE
231
7 8 6
5
10
9
4
PRESENCE/ ZONE 2
Subwoofer
system
Center
speaker
Front speakers (A)
Surround back speakers
LeftRight
LeftRight LeftRight
Surround speakers
Front
speakers
(B)
1
2
3
4
5
6
9
10
8
7
Speaker layout
(U.S.A. model)
LeftRight
You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, but they do not output sound simultaneously.
• The surround back speakers output the surround back channel included in Dolby Digital EX and DTS ES software and only
operate when the Dolby Digital EX or DTS ES decoder is turned on.
• The presence speakers output ambient effects created by the DSP sound fields. They do not output sound when other sound fields
are selected.
Presence speakers
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 13 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
14
SPEAKER SETUP
■ FRONT terminals
Connect one or two speaker systems to these terminals. If
you use only one speaker system, connect it to either the
FRONT A or B terminals.
The Canada model cannot output to two separate speaker systems
simultaneously.
Bi-wired connection
The unit also allows you to make bi-wired connections to
one speaker system. Use two pairs of speaker cables fo
r
each speaker (one pair for the woofer and one pair for the tweeter/
mid-range). To use the bi-wired connections, press
SPEAKERS
A and SPEAKERS B on the front panel so that both SP A and
B light up on the front panel display.
■ CENTER terminals
Connect a center speaker to these terminals.
■ SURROUND terminals
Connect surround speakers to these terminals.
■ SUBWOOFER jack
Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, such as the
YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,
to this jack.
■ SURROUND BACK terminals
Connect surround back speakers to these terminals. If you
only connect one surround back speaker, connect it to the
left (L) terminals.
■ PRESENCE terminals
Connect presence speakers to these terminals.
*
If you are using either U.S.A., Canada or Australia model, you
can also use these speakers as Zone 2 speakers (see page 57).
Note
Bi-wired connection
FRONT
R
L
+
–
+
–
+
+
–
–
A
B
This unit
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 14 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
CONNECTIONS
15
PREPARATION
Do not connect this unit or other components to the mains
power until all connections between components are
complete.
■ Signal directions and cable indications
■ Analog jacks
You can input analog signals from audio components by
connecting audio pin cable to the analog jacks on this unit.
Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the
left jacks.
■ Digital jacks
This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital
signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You
can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and
DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both
the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to
the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital
input jacks are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital
signals.
This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus
audio signals input to the analog jacks are only output to the
analog OUT (REC) jacks. Likewise audio signals input to the
digital (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks are only output to the
DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks.
Dust protection cap
Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect
the fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are
not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in
place. This cap protects the jack from dust.
■ Video jacks
This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection
depends on the availability of input jacks on your monitor.
The signals input through the VIDEO jack on this unit can
be output through the S VIDEO and COMPONENT
VIDEO jacks (see page 56). The signals input through the
S VIDEO jack can be output through the VIDEO jack
when V CONV. is set to ON (see page 56).
VIDEO jack
For conventional composite video signals.
S VIDEO jack
For S-video signals, separated into luminance (Y) and
color (C) video signals to achieve high-quality color
reproduction.
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
For component signals, separated into luminance (Y) and
color difference (P
B, PR) to provide the best quality in
picture reproduction.
When signals are input through both the S VIDEO and VIDEO
jacks, signals input through the S VIDEO jack have priority.
CONNECTIONS
Before connecting components
Note
CAUTION
S
V
O
V
V
V
L
R
C
video signal direction
left analog cables
right analog cables
optical cables
coaxial cables
video cables
S-video cables
For analog signals
For digital signals
For video signals
audio signal direction
Note
VIDEO
S VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 15 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
16
CONNECTIONS
■ Connections for DVD playback
Connecting video components
GND
M
SUR
SUB
WOO
CENTER
SUB
WOOFER
MONITOR OUT
MULCH CH INPUT OUTPUT
AUDIO AUDIO VIDEO
S VIDEO
DVD
DTV
CBL
/SAT
VIDEO
R
L
R
L
IN
(
PLAY
)
IN
(
PLAY
)
OUT
(
REC
)
OUT
(
REC
)
CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD
PHONO
IN
OUT
OUT
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
DVR/
VCR 2
VCR 1
CD-R
IN
MAIN/SURROUND BACK
SURROUND
TUNER
75Ω
UNBAL.
AM
ANT
GND
FM ANT
COMPONENT VIDEO
P
R
DVD
MONITOR OUT
DTV
P
B
Y
DIGITAL OUTPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
OPTICAL
MD
/
TAPE
CD-R
DVD
CBL/SAT
CD
CD
DVD
DTV
COAXIAL
LR
O
DVD player
Video
monitor
(U.S.A. model)
Optical out Video out
Audio out
Video in
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 16 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
17
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
■ Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks
This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and
SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-disc player, external decoder, sound processor or pre-
amplifier.
If you set EXT.INPUT 6ch/8ch to “8ch” (see page 55), you can use input jacks assigned in EXT.INPUT FRONT
(page 55) together with the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to input 8 channels.
Connect the output jacks on your multi-disc player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match
the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels.
.
• When you select MULTI CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you
cannot select sound field programs.
• This unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that
you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature.
• When headphones are used, only front L/R channels are output.
Notes
CENTER
SUB
WOOFER
MULTI CH INPUT
AUDIO AUDIO
DVD
DTV
CBL
/SAT
R
L
R
L
IN
(
PLAY
)
IN
(
PLAY
)
CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD
IN
DVR/
VCR 2
VCR 1
IN
FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH)
SURROUND
LRLR
L
R
CENTER
SUB
WOOFER
MULTI CH INPUT
FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH)
SURROUND
LRLR
Multi-disc player/
External decoder
Multi-disc player/
External decoder
For 6-channel input For 8-channel input
Front
out
Surround
out
Subwoofer
out
Center
out
Front out
Surround
out
Subwoofer
out
Center
out
Surround
back out
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 17 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
18
CONNECTIONS
■ Connections for other video components
■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)
GND
M
A
SURR
SUB
WOO
F
CENTER
SUB
WOOFER
MONITOR OUT
MULCH CH INPUT OUTPUT
AUDIO AUDIO VIDEO
S VIDEO
DVD
DTV
CBL
/SAT
VIDEO
R
L
R
L
IN
(
PLAY
)
IN
(
PLAY
)
OUT
(
REC
)
OUT
(
REC
)
CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD
PHONO
IN
OUT
OUT
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
DVR/
VCR 2
VCR 1
CD-R
IN
MAIN/SURROUND BACK
SURROUND
TUNER
75Ω
UNBAL.
AM
ANT
GND
FM ANT
COMPONENT VIDEO
P
R
DVD
MONITOR OUT
DTV
P
B
Y
DIGITAL OUTPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
OPTICAL
MD
/
TAPE
CD-R
CD-R
DVD
CBL/SAT
CD
CD
DVD
DVR/
VCR2
COAXIAL
O
LR
LR
LR
C
Cable TV or
satellite tuner
(U.S.A. model)
DVD recorder
or VCR
Audio out
Video out
Optical out
Audio out Video out
Video in
Audio in
Connect a YAMAHA
CD recorder that
outputs OSD signals.
Coaxial out
S VIDEO VIDEO
L AUDIO R OPTICAL
VIDEO AUX
O
V
S
L
R
Game
console or
video camera
Video out
S video out
Audio out L
Audio out R
Optical out
Use these jacks to connect any video
source, such as a game console or
camcorder, to this unit.
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 18 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
19
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
■ Connections for audio components
■ Connecting a turntable
PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM
or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with
a low-output MC cartridge, use an in-line boosting
transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to
these jacks.
y
Connect your turntable to the GND terminal to reduce noise in
the signal. However you may hear less noise without the
connection to the GND terminal for some record players.
Connecting audio components
GND
CENTER
SUB
WOOFER
MULCH CH INPUT OUTPUT
AUDIO AUDIO
R
L
R
L
IN
(
PLAY
)
IN
(
PLAY
)
OUT
(
REC
)
OUT
(
REC
)
CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD
PHONO
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
DIGITAL OUTPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
OPTICAL
MD
/
TAPE
CD-R
DVD
CBL/SAT
CD
CD
DVD
DTV
COAXIAL
SURROUND
MAIN/SURROUND BACK
L
R
L
R
O
O
LR
O
L
R
LR
L
R
C
CD player
MD recorder or
tape deck
(U.S.A. model)
CD recorder*
Turntable
Optical out
Coaxial out
Audio out
Audio inAudio out
Optical in
Optical in
Audio in
Audio out
Audio out
GND
*Some CD recorders can be
connected to the VIDEO
CD-R jacks (see page 18).
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 19 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
20
CONNECTIONS
■ Connecting to an external amplifier
If you want to increase the power output to the speakers,
or want to use another amplifier, connect an external
amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks as follows.
• When audio pin plugs are connected to the PRE OUT jacks for
output to an external amplifier, it is not necessary to use the
corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. Set the volume of the
amplifier connected to this unit to the maximum.
• The signal output through the FRONT PRE OUT and CENTER
PRE OUT jacks are affected by the TONE CONTROL settings.
• Signals will only be output from the FRONT PRE OUT jacks
when SPEAKER A is turned off with ZONE B selected for SP
B SET (see page 57).
1 FRONT PRE OUT jacks
Front channel line output jacks.
2 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks
Surround channel line output jacks.
3 CENTER PRE OUT jack
Center channel line output jack.
4 SURROUND BACK / PRESENCE PRE OUT
jacks
Surround back or presence channel line output jacks.
5 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack
Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, such as the
YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,
to this jack.
• Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signal as the
corresponding speaker terminals. However, when both surround
back and presence speakers are connected to this unit, the
channel of the signals output from SURROUND BACK /
PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks may not correspond to the
location of the speakers connected through SURROUND
BACK / PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks.
• Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on
the subwoofer. It is also possible to adjust the volume level by
using the remote control of this unit (see “Manually adjusting
speaker levels” on page 45).
• Some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER jack
depending on the SPEAKER SET (see page 49) and LFE
LEVEL (see page 51) settings.
Notes
Notes
FRONT
SURROUND
PRE OUT
SUB
WOOFER
SURROUND BACK
/PRESENCE
CENTER
R
R
L
L
R
L
1
2
3
4
5
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 20 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
21
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this
unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient
signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the
designated terminals.
■ Connecting the AM loop antenna
1 Set up the AM loop antenna, then connect it
to the terminals on this unit.
2 Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop
antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and GND
terminals.
3 Orient the AM loop antenna for the best
reception.
• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.
• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an
outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.
• A property installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception
than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an
outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest
authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor
antennas.
■ 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter
(U.K. model only)
1 Open the cover of the
included 75-ohm/300-ohm
antenna adapter.
2 Cut the external sleeve
of the 75-ohm coaxial
cable and prepare it for
connection.
3 Cut the lead wire and
remove it.
4 Insert the cable
wire into the slot,
and clamp it with
pliers.
5 Snap the cover
into place.
■ FREQUENCY STEP switch
(Asia and General models only)
Because the interstation frequency
spacing differs in different areas, set
the FREQUENCY STEP switch
(locating on the rear panel) according
to the frequency spacing in your area.
• North, Central and South America: 100 kHz/10 kHz
• Other areas: 50 kHz/9 kHz
Before setting this switch, disconnect this unit’s AC
power cord from the wall outlet.
Connecting the antennas
MAI
N
SURR
O
SUB
WOOF
E
TUNER
AM
ANT
GND
FM ANT
75Ω
UNBAL.
COMPONENT VIDEO
P
R
V
D
O
NITOR OUT
T
V
P
B
Y
AM loop antenna
(included)
Ground (GND terminal)
For maximum safety and minimum interference,
connect the antenna
GND terminal to a good earth
ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven
into moist earth.
Indoor FM antenna
(included)
Notes
11 (7/16)
8 (5/16)
6 (1/14)
Unit:
mm (inch)
Lead wire
Clamp
Clamp
I
nsert the wire
i
nto slot.
100kHz/10kHz
FREQUENCY
STEP
50kHz/9kHz
FM AM
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 21 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
22
CONNECTIONS
■ Connecting the AC power cord
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
Plug the power cord into the AC inlet after all other
connections are complete, then plug the power cord to an
AC wall outlet.
Do not use other AC power cords. Use the one provided.
Use of other power cords may result in fire hazard or
electrical shock.
(Other models)
Plug the power cord into an AC wall outlet.
■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)
U.K. and Australia models.............................. 1 OUTLET
Korea model............................................................... None
Other models.................................................. 2 OUTLETS
Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your
other components to this unit. Power to the AC
OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON
(or SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY). These outlets
will supply power to any connected component whenever
this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power
consumption of components) that can be connected to the
AC OUTLET(S) is:
Asia and General models .......................................... 50 W
Korea model................................................................. N/A
Other models ........................................................... 100 W
■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(Asia and General models only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit
must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging
into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/220/230-
240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.
■ Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from
being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.
However if the power cord is disconnected from the AC
wall outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one
week, the stored data will be lost.
Connecting the power supply cord
AC OUTLETS
(U.S.A. model)
2
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(Asia and General models)
CAUTION
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 22 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
23
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
If you are using 6 ohm speakers, set the impedance to 6
ohms as follows before turning on the power.
Be sure this unit is in the standby mode.
1 On the front panel, while pressing down
SPEAKERS A, press STANDBY/ON.
“SP IMP.SET” appears on the front panel display for
a few seconds, then “Minimum 8ohms” appears.
2 Press SPEAKERS A or SPEAKERS B to
select the impedance of your speakers.
You can select either 6 ohms or 8 ohms.
3 Press STANDBY/ON to exit the setting.
This unit will be set to the standby mode.
y
You can also use SP IMP.SET (see page 57) to set the speaker
impedance.
When all connections are complete, turn on the power of
this unit.
1 Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on
the remote control) to turn on the power of
this unit.
2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
Speaker impedance setting
CAUTION
SPEAKER
S
A
STANDBY
/ON
SP IMP.SET
Minimum 8ohms
Turning on the power
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
FM/AM
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/TUNING
INPUT MODE
TONE CONTROL
MULTI CH
INPUT
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
VOLUME
PROGRAM INPUT
STANDBY
/ON
OPTIMIZER
MIC
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
SPEAKERS
A B
OPTICALRAUDIOL
VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO AUX
1
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
INPUT MODE
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
DTV
POWER
REC
POWER
AMP
AVTV
DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER
MULTI CH IN
CD
1
(U.S.A. model)
STANDBY
/ON
POWER
SYSTEM
or
Front panel
Remote control
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 23 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
AUTO SETUP
24
This receiver employs YAMAHA Parametric Room
Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) technology which lets you
avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and
achieves highly accurate sound adjustments. The supplied
optimizer microphone collects and analyzes the sound
your speakers produce in your actual listening
environment.
y
The basic setup feature (page 28) is useful if you want to set up
your system quickly and with minimal effort. However, we
recommend that you come back and perform auto setup later to
take advantage of YPAO and enjoy even higher fidelity.
• Loud test tones are output during the auto setup procedure.
Please be ready!
• If auto setup stops and error messages appear on the OSD,
follow the troubleshooting on page 27.
YPAO performs the following checks and makes
appropriate adjustments to give you the best possible
sound from your system.
WIRING
Checks which speakers are connected and the polarity of
each speaker.
DISTANCE
Checks the distance of each speaker from the listening
position and adjusts the timing of each channel.
SIZE
Checks the speaker’s frequency response and sets the
appropriate low frequency crossover for each channel.
EQUALIZING
Adjusts frequency and levels of each channel’s parametric
equalizer to reduce coloration across the channels and
create a cohesive sound field. This is particularly
important if you use different brands or sizes of speakers
for some channels or have a room with unique sonic
characteristics.
YPAO equalizing calibration incorporates three
parameters (frequency, level and Q factor) for each of the
seven bands in its parametric equalizer to provide highly
precise automatic adjustment of frequency characteristics.
LEVEL
Checks and adjusts the sound level (volume) of each
speaker.
1 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.
2 Place the optimizer microphone on a flat
level surface with the omni-directional
microphone head upward, at your normal
listening position.
• If possible, use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer
mic at the same height as your ears would be when
you are seated in your listening position.
AUTO SETUP
Introduction
Notes
Optimizer microphone setup
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
FM/AM
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/TUNING
INPUT MODE
TONE CONTROL
MULTI C
H
INPUT
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING M
O
AUTO/MAN'L M
O
PROGRAM INPUT
OPTIMIZER
MIC
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
SPEAKERS
A B
(U.S.A. model)
Optimizer microphone position
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 24 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
25
AUTO SETUP
PREPARATION
For best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible
during the auto setup procedure. If there is too much
ambient noise, the results may not be satisfactory.
y
If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the crossover
frequency, set the volume to about half way (or slightly less) and
set the crossover frequency to the maximum.
1 Switch on the receiver and video monitor.
Make sure the OSD is displayed.
2 Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then
press SET MENU to enter the SET MENU.
3 Press u / d to select AUTO SETUP, then
press i once to enter the main menu.
4 Press u / d repeatedly to select WIRING,
DISTANCE, SIZE, EQUALIZING or LEVEL.
5 When WIRING, DISTANCE, SIZE or LEVEL is
selected, press j / i to select:
CHECK
To automatically check and adjust the selected
item.
SKIP To skip the selected item and perform no
adjustments.
y
When using THX speakers, set SIZE to SKIP and make sure
that SMALL or SMLx2 is selected in SPEAKER SET
(page 49) and that 80Hz is selected in CROSS OVER
(page 50).
When EQUALIZING is selected, press j / i to
select:
FRONT To adjust the frequency response of
each speaker in accordance with the
sound of your front speakers.
Recommended if your front speakers
are of much higher quality than your
other speakers.
FLAT To average the frequency response of
all speakers. Recommended if all of
your speakers are of similar quality.
LOW To average the frequency response of
all speakers, giving priority to the
accuracy of bass frequencies.
MID To average the frequency response of
all speakers, giving priority to the
accuracy of mid-range frequencies.
HIGH To average the frequency response of
all speakers, giving priority to the
accuracy of high frequencies.
SKIP To skip the selected item and perform
no adjustments.
6 Press d to select SETUP, then press j / i to
select:
AUTO To automatically perform the entire
auto setup procedure.
STEP To pause for confirmation between
each check in the auto setup procedure.
RELOAD To restore the last auto setup setting.
7 Press d to select START PUSH +, then press
i.
Loud test tones will be output from each speaker and
WAIT appears during the auto setup procedure.
If E-10:OTHER ERROR appears during testing, restart the
procedure from step 3.
Starting the setup
SET MENU
A/B/C/D/E
MENU
AMP
then
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
SET MENU
. ;AUTO SETUP
;MANUAL SETUP
: Up/Down
p
/
p
: Select
-/+
1
AUTO:MENU
.WIRING;;;;;CHECK
DISTANCE;;;CHECK
SIZE;;;;;;;CHECK
EQUALIZING;;FLAT
LEVEL;;;;;;CHECK
SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO
START PUSH +
: Up/Down
p
/
p
: Select
-/+
Note
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 25 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
26
AUTO SETUP
If you selected AUTO in step 6
The RESULT display appears for a few seconds after each
check, then settings of the next item will start. The
RESULT:EXIT display appears after all items are set.
y
You can display each result by pressing u once and pressing i
repeatedly before exiting. Pressing d returns to the
RESULT:EXIT display.
8 To apply the changes, press j / i to select
SET, then press d to exit.
To cancel the auto setup procedure, press j /
i to select CANCEL, then press d to exit.
If you selected STEP in step 6
The RESULT display appears after each check.
8 Press j / i to display RESULT:EXIT, then
press j / i to select:
NEXT
Then press d to proceed and check the next item.
EXIT Then press d to exit the auto setup.
y
•Press u / d repeatedly to move between each display.
• If you are not satisfied with the result or want to manually
adjust each setup parameter, use the manual setup
parameters (see page 49).
• If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your
listening environment, perform AUTO SETUP again to re-
calibrate your system.
• In the DISTANCE results, the distance displayed may be longer
than the actual distance depending on the characteristics of your
subwoofer.
• In the EQUALIZING results, different values may be set for the
same band to provide finer adjustments.
If you selected RELOAD in step 6
The RESULT:EXIT display appears.
y
You can display each result by pressing u once and pressing i
repeatedly before exiting. Pressing d returns to the
RESULT:EXIT display.
8 Press j / i to select SET, then press d to
exit.
Notes
/ : Up/Down
p
p
-/+ : Back/Next
RESULT:WIRING
FRONT L;;;;;;;OK
/ : Up/Down
p
p
EQ;;;;;FRONT L
63Hz;;;-2.0dB
125Hz;;;-5.0dB
500Hz;;;;;;0dB
630Hz;;;;;;0dB
1.0kHz;;;;;;0dB
3.15kHz;;;+3.0dB
10.0kHz;;;+1.0dB
RESULT:EQUALIZI.
/ : Up/Down
p
p
-/+ : Back/Next
. FRONT L;;;;3.20m
CENTER;;;;;3.30m
FRONT R;;;;2.90m
PRES L;;;;;1.70m
PRES R;;;;;1.50m
RESULT:DISTANCE1
/ : Up/Down
p
p
-/+ : Back/Next
. FRONT L;;;+5.0dB
CENTER;;;;-4.5dB
FRONT R;;;+5.5dB
PRES L;;;;-3.0dB
PRES R;;;;;;--dB
RESULT:LEVEL 1
/ : Up/Down
p
p
-/+ : Back/Next
FRONT L;;;;;;LRG
RESULT:SIZE 1
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 26 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
27
AUTO SETUP
PREPARATION
■ Troubleshooting for auto setup procedure
Before auto setup
During auto setup
Press j / i to display the detailed information about the individual error. Select RETRY to try auto setup procedure again.
After auto setup
Press j / i to display the detailed information about the individual warning.
• If the warning message W-2 or W-3 appears on the OSD, no corrections are made. In such cases, correct the problem, select CHECK
in DISTANCE or LEVEL, then perform the auto setup procedure again.
• If the message W-1, W-4 or W-5 appears on the OSD, corrections are made. However, the corrections may not be correct. In such
cases, correct the problem, then perform the auto setup procedure again on the relevant setting items.
Error message Cause Remedy
Connect MIC!
Optimizer microphone is not connected. • Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the
OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel.
Unplug HP!
Headphones are connected. • Unplug the headphones.
Error message Cause Remedy
E-1:NO FRONT SP
Front L/R channel signal(s) is (are) not
detected.
• Select the front speakers with SPEAKER A or B.
• Check the front L/R speaker connections.
E-2:NO SURR.SP
A surround channel signal is not detected. • Check the surround speaker connections.
E-3:NO PRES. SP
A presence channel signal is not detected. • Check the presence speaker connections.
E-4:SBR->SBL
Only right surround back channel signal is
detected.
• Connect the surround back speaker to the LEFT
SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS terminal if you
only have one surround back speaker.
E-5:NOISY
Background noise is too loud. • Try auto setup procedure in quiet environment.
• Turn off noisy electric equipment like air conditioners
(etc.) or move it away from this unit.
E-6:CHECK SURR.
Surround back speaker(s) is (are) connected,
though surround L/R speakers are not.
• Connect surround speakers when you use (a)
surround back speaker(s).
E-7:NO MIC
The optimizer microphone was unplugged
during the auto setup procedure.
• Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to
OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel.
E-8:NO SIGNAL
The optimizer microphone does not detect test
tones.
• Check the microphone setting.
• Check the speaker connections and placement.
E-9:USER CANCEL
The auto setup procedure was cancelled
because a setting which affects the auto setup
was changed during the procedure.
• Perform the auto setup procedure again.
Warning message Cause Remedy
W-1:OUT OF PHASE
Speaker polarity is not correct. This message
may appear depending on the speakers even
when the speakers are connected correctly.
• Check the speaker connections.
W-2:OVER 24m
(80ft)
The distance between the speaker and the
listening position is over 24 m (80 ft.).
• Bring the speaker closer to the listening position.
W-3:LEVEL ERROR
The difference of volume level among speakers
is excessive. (No level correction is made.)
• Readjust the speaker installation.
• Check the speaker connections.
• Use speakers of similar quality.
• Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer.
W-4:SWFR PHASE
The phase polarity of the subwoofer is not
correct.
• We recommend that you select the opposite phase on
the subwoofer if the subwoofer has a phase switch.
W-5:VOL ERROR
The result may not be correct because the
volume was changed during the auto setup
procedure.
• Perform the auto setup procedure again. Do not
change the volume during the auto setup procedure.
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 27 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
BASIC SETUP
28
The basic system parameters are set automatically when
you run auto setup (page 24). The basic settings are useful
if you want to quickly setup your speakers or to manually
adjust some of the items set in
auto setup.
y
• If you wish to configure the unit manually using more precise
adjustments, use the detailed parameters in the SOUND menu
(page 49) instead of using the BASIC menu.
• Altering any parameters in the BASIC menu will reset all
parameters in the SOUND menu.
1 Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then
press SET MENU to enter the SET MENU.
2 Press u / d repeatedly to select MANUAL
SETUP, then press j / i to enter the selected
category.
If u is pressed when AUTO SETUP is selected, or if
d is pressed when MANUAL SETUP is selected,
SET MENU will be closed. Press u / d to open SET
MENU again.
3 Press d once to select BASIC MENU,
then press j / i to enter the menu item.
4 When ROOM is selected, press j / i to
change the setting.
Select the size of the room you have installed your
speakers in. Roughly speaking, the room sizes are
defined as follows:
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
S (small) 16 x 13 ft, 200 ft
2
(4.8 x 4.0 m, 20 m
2
)
M (medium) 20 x 16 ft, 300 ft
2
(6.3 x 5.0 m, 30 m
2
)
L (large) 26 x 19 ft, 450 ft
2
(7.9 x 5.8 m, 45 m
2
)
[Other models]
S (small) 3.6 x 2.8 m, 10 m
2
M (medium) 4.8 x 4.0 m, 20 m
2
L (large) 6.3 x 5.0 m, 30 m
2
5 Press d to select SWFR, then press j / i to
select:
YES
If you have a subwoofer in your system.
NONE If you do not have a subwoofer in your system.
6 Press d to select PRESENCE, then press j /
i to select:
YES
If you have presence speakers in your system.
NONE If you do not have presence speakers in your
system.
BASIC SETUP
Using BASIC setup
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
AUDI O
VOL
LEVEL
MENU
STRAIGHT
STEREO
ENTERTAIN MOVIE
TEST
ON SCREEN
EFFECT
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
HALL
CHCH
JAZZ
ROCK
TITLE
MUTE
+
+
+
–
–
–
3421
MUSIC TV THTR
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
INPUT MODE
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
DTV
POWER
REC
POWER
AMP
AVTV
DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER
MULTI CH IN
CD
1
2-9
1
SET MENU
A/B/C/D/E
MENU
AMP
then
SET MENU
;AUTO SETUP
. ;MANUAL SETUP
: Up/Down
p
/
p
: Select
-/+
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
then
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
1
BASIC MENU 1/2
.ROOM:[SML
SWFR:[YESNONE
PRESENCE;;;;NONE
SPEAKERS;;;;7spk
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 28 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
29
BASIC SETUP
PREPARATION
7 Press d to select SPEAKERS, then press j /
i to select the number of speakers
connected to the unit.
The choices vary as follows depending on the
PRESENCE setting:
8 After you have finished the settings, press
d, then press j / i to select:
SET To apply the changes.
CANCEL To cancel the setup.
If you select SET, you will hear a test tone from each
speaker.
9 Press d to select CHECK OK?, then press j /
i to select:
YES
To exit the setup if the test tones were
satisfactory.
NO To adjust each speaker level (see page 50).
Choices
PRESENCE setting
YES NONE
2
——
Front L/R
3
——
Front L/R,
Center
4
Presence L/R,
Front L/R
Front L/R,
Surround L/R
5
Presence L/R,
Front L/R,
Center
Front L/R,
Center,
Surround L/R
6
Presence L/R,
Front L/R,
Surround L/R
Front L/R,
Center,
Surround L/R,
Surround back
7
Presence L/R,
Front L/R,
Center,
Surround L/R
Front L/R,
Center,
Surround L/R,
Surround back
L/R
8
Presence L/R,
Front L/R,
Center,
Surround L/R,
Surround back
——
9
Presence L/R,
Front L/R,
Center,
Surround L/R,
Surround back
L/R
——
LL C R
SL SB SR
LL C R
SL SB SR
LL R
LL C R
SL SB SR
LL RC
LL C R
SL SB
SB
SR
LL R
SL SR
LL C R
SL SB SR
LL C R
SL SR
LL C R
SL SB SR
LL C R
SL SB SR
LL C R
SL SB SR
.[SET CANCEL
ROOM SIZE=SMALL
1 BASIC MENU 2/2
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.
However, if the power cord is disconnected from the
AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one
week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the
items again.
. CHECK OK?;;;;YES
1 BASIC MENU 2/2
-+
. FR
C
SL
B)SPEAKER
LEVEL
(when NO is selected)
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 29 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
PLAYBACK
30
1 Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the
remote control) to turn on the power.
2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
3 Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel.
Each press turns the respective speakers on or off.
y
When bi-wiring, select both A and B.
4 Select the input source.
Use INPUT (or press one of the input selector buttons
on the remote control) to select the input you desire.
The current input source name and input mode appear
in the front panel display and video monitor for a few
seconds.
5 Start playback or select a broadcast station
on the source component.
Refer to the operation instructions for the component.
6 Adjust the volume to the desired output level.
7 Select a sound field program if desired.
Use PROGRAM (or press AMP to select the AMP
mode, then press one of the sound field program
buttons repeatedly) to select a sound field program.
See page 41 for details about sound field programs.
Dialog Normalisation
When this unit detects Dolby Digital signals, the
following display appears for a few seconds. This shows
how the signal level is being corrected to become the
reference level (-27 dB, THX recommendation).
PLAYBACK
Basic operations
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
FM/AM
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/TUNING
INPUT MODE
TONE CONTROL
MULTI CH
INPUT
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
VOLUME
PROGRAM INPUT
STANDBY
/ON
OPTIMIZER
MIC
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
SPEAKERS
A B
OPTICALRAUDIOL
VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO AUX
1
7
43
6
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
INPUT MODE
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
DTV
POWER
REC
POWER
AMP
AVTV
DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER
MULTI CH IN
CD
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
AUDI O
VOL
LEVEL
MENU
STRAIGHT
STEREO
ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR
NIGHT
EX/ES
MOVIE
THX /DTS
TEST
ON SCREEN
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
HALL
CHCH
JAZZ
ROCK
TITLE
MUTE
+
+
+
–
–
–
3421
5
90
+10 ENTER
67 8
1
4
6
7
4
7
(U.S.A. model)
STANDBY
/ON
POWER
SYSTEM
Front panel Remote control
or
SPEAKERS
A B
TUNERPHONO
V
-
AUX
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
CD
MULTI CH IN
INPUT
Front panel Remote control
or
V–AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
PHONO
VOLUME
A
SP
LL R
DVD AUTO
Selected input source
Input mode
VOLUME
VOL
+
–
or
Remote control
Front panel
PROGRAM
STEREO
ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR
NIGHT
EX/ES
MOVIE
THX
/DTS
CHP/INDEX
HALL
JAZZ
ROCK
3421
5
90
+10 ENTER
67 8
AMP
Remote control
Front panel
or
DialNorm;;+4dB
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 30 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
31
PLAYBACK
BASIC
OPERATION
To listen with headphones (SILENT CINEMA)
The SILENT CINEMA mode allows you to enjoy multi-
channel music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital
and DTS surround, through ordinary headphones.
SILENT CINEMA activates automatically whenever you
connect headphones to the PHONES jack while listening
to CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs. The
“SILENT CINEMA” indicator lights up on the front panel
display. (If the sound field programs are off, you listen
with normal stereo reproduction.)
This unit will not be set to the SILENT CINEMA mode when
MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source.
To adjust the tone
You can adjust the bass/treble
balance for the front left/right and
center channels.
Press TONE CONTROL
repeatedly on the front panel to
select TREBLE or BASS.
Select TREBLE, then rotate
PROGRAM to the right or left to
increase or decrease the high-
frequency response.
Select BASS, then rotate PROGRAM to the right or left to
increase or decrease the low-frequency response.
To cancel the tone control, press TONE CONTROL
repeatedly to select BYPASS.
• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the low-
frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the
surround speakers may not match that of the front left/right and
center speakers.
• TONE CONTROL is not effective when THX (page 41) or
DIRECT STEREO (page 33) program is selected, or when
MULTI CH INPUT is selected.
• TONE CONTROL is not effective for headphones. Use HP
TONE CTRL to adjust bass/treble balance for the headphones
(page 53).
To mute the sound
Press MUTE on the remote control.
“MUTE” blinks on the front panel
display.
To resume the audio output, press
MUTE again. (or press VOL –/+). “MUTE” disappears
from the display.
y
You can adjust the muting level (see page 53).
■ Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT
Press MULTI CH INPUT so that “MULTI CH INPUT”
appears in the front panel display and video monitor.
When “MULTI CH INPUT” is shown on the front panel display
and/or the video monitor, no other source can be played. To select
another input source with INPUT (or one of the input selector
buttons), press MULTI CH INPUT to turn off “MULTI CH
INPUT” from the front panel display and the video monitor.
■ Playing video sources in the
background
You can combine a video image from a video source with
a sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy
listening to classical music while having beautiful scenery
from the video source on the video monitor.
Use the input selector buttons to select a video source,
then select an audio source.
If you want to enjoy an audio source connected to the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video
source and then press MULTI CH INPUT.
Note
Notes
TONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
MUTE
Note
Note
MULTI CH
INPUT
MULTI CH IN
Front panel Remote control
or
TUNERPHONO
V
-
AUX
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
CD
MULTI CH IN
Audio sources
Video sources
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 31 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
32
PLAYBACK
■ Front panel operation
Rotate PROGRAM to select the desired program.
The name of the selected program appears on the front
panel display and on the video monitor.
■ Remote control operation
Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press
one of the sound field program buttons
repeatedly to select the desired program.
The name of the selected program appears on the front
panel display and on the video monitor.
y
Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference,
and not on the name of the program.
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects
the last sound field program used with that source.
• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the MULTI CH
INPUT is selected.
• Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz (except for DTS 96/
24 signals) will be sampled down to 48 kHz, then sound field
programs will be applied.
■ Enjoying multi-channel software
If you connected a surround back speaker, use this feature
to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel
sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital
Surround EX or DTS ES decoders.
Press EX/ES on the remote control to switch
between 5.1- and 6.1/7.1- channel playback.
To select a decoder, press l/h repeatedly when
PLIIx Movie (etc.) is displayed.
AUTO (AUTO)
When a signal (flag) that can be recognized by the unit is
input, the unit selects the optimum decoder for playing
back the signal in 6.1/7.1 channels.
If the unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present in
the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in 6.1/
7.1 channels.
Decoders (select with l/h)
You can select from the following modes depending on the
format of the software you are playing.
PLIIx Movie For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS
signals in 7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx movie
decoder.
PLIIx Music For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS
signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx music
decoder.
EX/ES For playing back Dolby Digital signals in 6.1/7.1
channels using the Dolby Digital Surround EX decoder.
DTS signals are played back in 6.1/7.1 channels using the
DTS ES decoder.
EX For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/
7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital Surround EX
decoder.
OFF (OFF)
For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 5.1
channels.
y
When SURR B L/R SP is set to “LRGx1” or “SMLx1” (see
page 49), the surround back channel will be output from the left
SURROUND BACK speaker terminals.
Selecting sound field programs
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
FM/AM
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/TUNING
INPUT MODE
TONE CONTROL
MULTI CH
INPUT
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
VOLUME
PROGRAM INPUT
STANDBY
/ON
OPTIMIZER
MIC
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
SPEAKERS
A B
OPTICALRAUDIOL
VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO AUX
PROGRAM
(U.S.A. model)
JAZZ CLUB
V–AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
PHONO
HiFi DSP
VOLUME
A
SP
LL R
Program name
PROGRAM
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
INPUT MODE
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
DTV
POWER
REC
AUDI O
POWER
AMP
AVTV
DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER
MULTI CH IN
CD
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
LEVEL
MENU
STRAIGHT
STEREO
ENTERTAIN
NIGHT
MOVIE
THX
/DTS
TEST
ON SCREEN
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
HALL
CHCH
JAZZ
ROCK
TITLE
MUTE
+
+
–
–
3421
5
90
+10 ENTER
67 8
MUSIC TV THTR
EX/ES
Sound field
program
buttons
AMP
JAZZ CLUB
V–AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
PHONO
HiFi DSP
VOLUME
A
SP
LL R
program name
MUSIC TV THTR
EX/ES
STEREO
ENTERTAIN
NIGHT
MOVIE
THX
/DTS
CHP/INDEX
HALL
JAZZ
ROCK
3421
5
90
+10 ENTER
67 8
Notes
EX/ES
CHP/INDEX
ENTER
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 32 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
33
PLAYBACK
BASIC
OPERATION
• Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal (flag)
which this unit can automatically detect. When playing these
kinds of discs with 6.1-channel, select “ON”.
• 6.1-channel playback is not possible even if EX/ES is pressed in
the following cases:
– When SURR B L/R SP is set to “NONE” (see page 49).
– When the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jack is
being played.
– When the source being played does not contain surround L/R
channel signals.
– When Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played.
– When “2ch Stereo”, “7ch Stereo” or “Direct Stereo” is
selected.
• When the power of this unit is turned off, the input mode will be
reset to AUTO.
• When the DTS ES decoder is applied to DTS 96/24 signals, you
cannot use the DTS 96/24 decoding feature.
• The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when SURR B L/R
SP is set to “NONE” (see page 49).
• “PLIIx Movie” cannot be selected when SURR B L/R SP is set
to “LRGx1” or “SMLx1” (see page 49).
■ Enjoying 2-channel software
Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played
back on multiple channels.
Press q/DTS on the remote control to select the
decoder.
You can select from the following modes depending on the
type of software you are playing and your personal
preference.
PRO LOGIC SUR. STANDARD
Standard processing for Dolby Surround sources.
PRO LOGIC SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for Dolby Surround
sources
PRO LOGIC IIx Movie
*
Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for movie software.
PRO LOGIC IIx Music
*
Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for music software.
PRO LOGIC IIx Game
*
Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for game software.
DTS Neo:6 Cinema
DTS processing for movie software.
DTS Neo:6 Music
DTS processing for music software.
*
Use the PLII/PLIIx parameter to select the Pro Logic II or
Pro Logic IIx decoders (see page 76).
The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when SURR B L/R SP
is set to “NONE” (see page 49).
■ Listening to high fidelity stereo sound
(Direct Stereo)
Direct Stereo allows you to bypass this unit’s decoders and
DSP processors to enjoy pure high fidelity sound from 2-
channel PCM and analog sources.
Rotate PROGRAM (or press AMP to select the
AMP mode, then press STEREO repeatedly) to
select DIRECT STEREO.
• To avoid unexpected noise, do not play DTS-encoded CDs in
this mode.
• When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input,
this unit automatically selects an analog signal input. (When
DTS is selected as an input mode, no sound will be heard.)
• No sound will be output from the subwoofer.
• TONE CONTROL (page 31) and SET MENU (page 47)
settings are not effective.
• The front panel display automatically dims.
■ Listening at night
This mode reproduces dialogue clearly while reducing the
volume of loud sound effects for easier listening at low
volumes or at night.
Press NIGHT on the remote control.
The NIGHT indicator in the front panel
display lights up.
Press NIGHT again to cancel. The
NIGHT indicator goes off.
y
• You can use the night listening mode with any sound field
programs except Direct Stereo (even though the NIGHT
indicator lights up during Direct Stereo mode).
• Night listening mode may vary in effectiveness depending on
the input source and surround sound settings you use.
Notes
/DTS
0
Note
Notes
STEREO
ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR
NIGHT
EX/ES
MOVIE
THX
/DTS
CHP/INDEX
HALL
JAZZ
ROCK
3421
5
90
+10 ENTER
67 8
Direct Stereo
Front panel
or
PROGRAM
Remote control
NIGHT
+10
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 33 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
34
PLAYBACK
■ Downmixing to 2 channels
You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback even from multi-
channel sources.
Rotate PROGRAM (or press STEREO on the
remote control) to select 2ch Stereo.
y
You can use a subwoofer with this program when SWFR or
BOTH is selected in LFE/BASS OUT.
■ Listening to unprocessed input signals
Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to select STRAIGHT.
Two channel stereo sources are output from only the front
left and right speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded
straight into the appropriate channels without any
additional effect processing.
Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT again so that “STRAIGHT”
disappears from the display when you want to turn the
sound effect back on.
■ Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA
DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates
virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field.
If you do not connect surround speakers, Virtual CINEMA
DSP activates automatically whenever you select a
CINEMA DSP sound field program.
Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate, even when SURR L/R
SP is set to “NONE” (see page 49) in the following cases:
– When MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source.
– When headphones are connected.
This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Do the
following to select the type of input signals you want to
use.
1 Select the input source.
2 Press INPUT MODE to select an input mode.
In most cases, use AUTO.
AUTO Automatically selects input signals in
the following order:
1) Digital signals*
2) Analog signals
DTS Selects only digital signals encoded in
DTS. If no DTS signals are input, no
sound is output.
ANALOG Selects only analog signals. If no
analog signals are input, no sound is
output.
* If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the
decoder automatically switches to the appropriate sound
field program.
y
You can adjust the default input mode this unit selects when the
power is turned on (see page 54).
Note
2ch Stereo
STEREO
ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR
NIGHT
EX/ES
MOVIE
THX
/DTS
CHP/INDEX
HALL
JAZZ
ROCK
3421
5
90
+10 ENTER
67 8
Front panel
or
PROGRAM
Remote control
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
Front panel Remote control
or
Selecting input modes
INPUT
TUNERPHONO
V
-
AUX
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
CD
MULTI CH IN
or
Front panel Remote control
INPUT MODE
V–AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
PHONO
VOLUME
A
SP
LL R
DVD
AUTO
TUNERPHONO
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
INPUT MODE
SYSTEM
CD
MULTI CH IN
Front panel Remote control
or
Input mode
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 34 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
35
PLAYBACK
BASIC
OPERATION
• When you play DTS encoded sources with the input mode set to
AUTO:
– This unit automatically switches to the DTS decoding mode.
The unit remains in DTS mode (and the “t” indicator may
flash) for up to 30 second after playback of the DTS source is
complete. To manually release the DTS mode, press INPUT
MODE to reselect AUTO.
– The DTS decoding mode may be released if search or skip
operations are performed for more than 30 seconds. To
prevent this, press INPUT MODE to select DTS.
• If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any
way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you
make a digital connection between this unit and the player.
Displaying the information about the input
source
You can display the type, format and sampling frequency
of the current input signal.
1 Select the input source.
2 Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then
press STRAIGHT/EFFECT so that
“STRAIGHT” appears in the display.
3 Press u / d to display the following
information about the input signal.
(Format) Signal format display. When the unit
cannot detect a digital signal it
automatically switches to analog input.
in Number of source channels in the input
signal. For example, a multi-channel
soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2
surround channels and LFE, is
displayed as “3/2/ LFE”.
fs Sampling frequency. When the unit is
unable to detect the sampling
frequency “Unknown” appears.
rate Bit rate. When the unit is unable to
detect the bit rate “Unknown” appears.
flg Flag data encoded with DTS or Dolby
Digital signals that cue this unit to
automatically switch decoders.
Notes
TUNERPHONO
V
-
AUX
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
CD
MULTI CH IN
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
AMP
then
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 35 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
TUNING
36
There are 2 tuning methods; automatic and manual.
Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are
strong and there is no interference.
■ Automatic tuning
1 Rotate INPUT (or press TUNER on the remote
control) to select TUNER as the input source.
2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band.
“FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display.
3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)
so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the
front panel display.
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning
is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to
turn the colon (:) off.
4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin
automatic tuning.
Press h to tune in to a higher frequency, or press l
to tune in to a lower frequency.
When tuned in to a station, the “TUNED” indicator
lights up and the frequency of the received station is
shown on the front panel display.
■ Manual tuning
If the signal from the station you want to select is weak,
you must tune into it manually. Manually tuning in to an
FM station will automatically change the reception mode
to monaural to increase the signal quality.
1 Select TUNER and the reception band
following steps 1 and 2 as described in
“Automatic tuning”.
2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)
so that the “AUTO” indicator disappears from
the front panel display.
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning
is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to
turn the colon (:) off.
3 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune in to
the desired station manually.
Hold down the button to
continue searching.
TUNING
Automatic and manual tuning
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
FM/AM
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/TUNING
INPUT MODE
TONE CONTROL
MULTI CH
INPUT
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
VOLUME
PROGRAM INPUT
STANDBY
/ON
OPTIMIZER
MIC
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
SPEAKERS
A B
OPTICALRAUDIOL
VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO AUX
3 2 34 1
(U.S.A. model)
INPUT
TUNERPHONO
V
-
AUX
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
CD
MULTI CH IN
or
Front panel
Remote control
FM/AM
or
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
AUT
O
Lights up
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TU
N
TUNED
AUTO
A~~AM~1440 kHz
PRESET/TUNING
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TU
N
TUNED
AUTO
A~~AM~1530 kHz
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
AUT
O
Disappears
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUN
E
TUNED
A~~AM~1440 kHz
PRESET/TUNING
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 36 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
37
TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
■ Automatically presetting FM stations
You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store
FM stations. This function enables this unit to
automatically tune in to FM stations with strong signals,
and to store up to 40 (8 stations x 5 groups, A1-E8) of
those stations in order. You can then recall any preset
station easily by selecting the preset station number.
1 Press FM/AM to select the FM band.
2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)
so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the
front panel display.
3 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)
for more than 3 seconds.
The preset number, the “MEMORY” and “AUTO”
indicators flash. After about 5 seconds, automatic
presetting starts from the frequency currently
displayed and proceeds toward the higher
frequencies.
When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front
panel display shows the frequency of the last preset
station.
• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is
cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.
• If the number of the received stations does not reach 40 (E8)
E8, automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after
searching all stations.
• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored
automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you
want to store is weak in signal strength, tune in to it manually in
the monaural mode, and store it by following the procedure in
“Manually presetting stations”.
Automatic preset tuning options
You can select the preset number from which this unit will
store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower
frequencies.
After pressing MEMORY in step 3:
1 Press A/B/C/D/E, then PRESET/TUNING l / h to
select the preset number under which the first station
will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when
stations have all been stored up to E8.
2 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon
(:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin
tuning toward lower frequencies.
Presetting stations
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
FM/AM
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/TUNING
INPUT MODE
TONE CONTROL
MULTI CH
INPUT
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
VOLUME
PROGRAM INPUT
STANDBY
/ON
OPTIMIZER
MIC
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
SPEAKERS
A B
OPTICALRAUDIOL
VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO AUX
321
(U.S.A. model)
FM/AM
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
AUT
O
Lights up
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
V–AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
PHONO
AUTO
MEMORY
VOLUME
A
SP
LL R
A1:FM 87.5 MHz
Notes
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby
mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC
outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to
power failure. However, if the power is cut for more
than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If
so, store the stations again by using the presetting
station methods.
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 37 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
38
TUNING
■ Manually presetting stations
You can also store up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5 groups)
manually.
1 Tune in to a station.
See page 36 for tuning instructions.
When tuned in to a station, the front panel display
shows the frequency of the station received.
2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM).
The “MEMORY” indicator flashes for about 5
seconds.
3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset
station group (A to E) while the “MEMORY”
indicator is flashing.
The group letter appears. Check that the colon (:)
appears on the front panel display.
4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a
preset station number (1 to 8) while the
“MEMORY” indicator is flashing.
Press h to select a higher preset station number.
Press l to select a lower preset station number.
5 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the
front panel while the “MEMORY” indicator is
flashing.
The station band and
frequency appear on the front
panel display with the preset
group and number you have
selected.
6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations.
• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is
cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.
• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with
the station frequency.
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
FM/AM
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/TUNING
INPUT MODE
TONE CONTROL
MULTI CH
INPUT
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
VOLUME
PROGRAM INPUT
STANDBY
/ON
OPTIMIZER
MIC
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
SPEAKERS
A B
OPTICALRAUDIOL
VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO AUX
3 2,5
4
(U.S.A. model)
V–AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
PHONO
TUNED
VOLUME
A B
SP
LL R
A :AM 630 kHz
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
Flashes
A/B/C/D/E
V–AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
PHONO
TUNED MEMORY
VOLUME
A
SP
LL R
C :AM 630 kHz
Notes
PRESET/TUNING
V–AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
PHONO
TUNED MEMORY
VOLUME
A
SP
LL R
C3:AM 630 kHz
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
V–AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
PHONO
TUNED MEMORY
VOLUME
A
SP
LL R
C3:AM 630 kHz
Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3.
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 38 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
39
TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the
preset station number under which it was stored.
1 Press A/B/C/D/E to select the preset station
group.
The preset group letter appears on the front panel
display and changes each time you press the button.
2 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (PRESET j / i
on the remote control) to select a preset
station number (1 to 8).
The preset group and number appear on the front
panel display along with the station band, frequency
and the “TUNED” indicator lights up.
You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations
with each other. The example below describes the
procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”.
1 Select preset station “E1” by using the
A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h.
See “Selecting preset stations”.
2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for
more than 3 seconds.
“E1” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the
front panel display.
3 Select preset station “A5” by using
A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h.
“A5” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the
front panel display.
4 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again.
The stations stored at the two preset assignments are
exchanged.
Selecting preset stations
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
FM/AM
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/TUNING
INPUT MODE
TONE CONTROL
MULTI CH
INPUT
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
VOLUME
PROGRAM INPUT
STANDBY
/ON
OPTIMIZER
MIC
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
SPEAKERS
A B
OPTICALRAUDIOL
VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO AUX
1
2
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
LEVEL
MENU
STRAIGHT
TEST
ON SCREEN
EFFECT
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
TITLE
MUTE
+
+
–
–
1
2
(U.S.A. model)
A/B/C/D/E
SET MENU
A/B/C/D/E
MENU
or
Front panel Remote control
PRESET/TUNING
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
C
R2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
TUNED
V
O
E1:FM 87.5 MHz
or
Front panel
Remote control
Exchanging preset stations
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
FM/AM
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/TUNING
INPUT MODE
TONE CONTROL
MULTI CH
INPUT
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
VOLUME
PROGRAM INPUT
STANDBY
/ON
OPTIMIZER
MIC
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
SPEAKERS
A B
OPTICALRAUDIOL
VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO AUX
1,3
1,3
2,4
(U.S.A. model)
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
C
R2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
TUNED MEMORY
V
O
E1:FM 87.5 MHz
V–AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
PHONO
TUNED MEMORY
VOLUME
A B
SP
LL R
A5:FM 90.6 MHz
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT E1-A5
V–AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–
R
A
SP
Shows the exchange of stations is complete.
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 39 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
RECORDING
40
Recording adjustments and other operations are
performed from the recording components. Refer to the
operation instructions for those components.
1 Turn on the power of this unit and all
connected components.
2 Select the source component you want to
record from.
3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station)
on the source component.
4 Start recording on the recording component.
• Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.
• When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record
between other components connected to this unit.
• The setting of TONE CONTROL, VOLUME, “Speaker level”
(page 50) and programs does not affect the recorded material.
• A source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit
cannot be recorded.
• S-video and composite video signals pass independently
through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or
dubbing video signals, if your video source component is
connected to provide only an S-video (or only a composite
video) signal, you can record only an S-video (or only a
composite video) signal to your VCR.
• A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT
channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not
output on VCR 1 OUT.)
• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from
records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may
infringe copyright laws.
■ Special considerations when recording
DTS software
The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to
digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise
being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to
record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them,
the following considerations and adjustments need to be
made.
For LDs, DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your
player is compatible with the DTS format, follow its
operation instruction to make a setting so that the analog
signal will be output from the player.
RECORDING
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
FM/AM
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/TUNING
INPUT MODE
TONE CONTROL
MULTI CH
INPUT
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
VOLUME
PROGRAM INPUT
STANDBY
/ON
OPTIMIZER
MIC
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
SPEAKERS
A B
OPTICALRAUDIOL
VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO AUX
1 2
(U.S.A. model)
INPUT
TUNERPHONO
V
-
AUX
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
CD
MULTI CH IN
or
Front panel Remote control
Notes
If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the
picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals.
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 40 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
41
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multichannel playback from
almost any sound source (stereo or multichannel). This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field
processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.
Most of these sound field programs are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments found in famous
concert halls, music venues, and movie theaters.
y
The Yamaha CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set INPUT MODE to
AUTO (see page 34) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal.
You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked “MULTI”
can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked “
2-CH” can be used with 2-channel
(stereo) sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc.
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
For movie/video sources
Program Features Sources
STEREO:
2ch Stereo
Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 (left and right) channels or plays back 2-channel
sources as is.
MULTI
2-CH
MOVIE THEATER:
Spectacle
CINEMA DSP processing. This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm
movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the
sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby
Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions).
MOVIE THEATER:
Sci-Fi
CINEMA DSP processing. This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the
latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space
amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes
Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced
techniques.
MOVIE THEATER:
Adventure
CINEMA DSP processing. This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of
the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to
that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained
as much as possible.
MOVIE THEATER:
General
CINEMA DSP processing. This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and
multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by soft and extensive sound field. The
presence sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen,
restraining the echo effect of conversations without losing clarity.
THX Cinema
THX processing for any multi-channel sources.
THX Surr. EX
THX processing for Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital EX sources. This program is available
only when surround back L/R speakers are connected to this unit and when the input source
contains surround back channel signals.
MULTI
dts ES+THX
THX processing for DTS ES sources.
DOLBY DIGITAL:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard 5.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.
DOLBY DIGITAL:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for Dolby Digital sources.
q D+PLIIx Movie:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard 6.1/7.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.
q D+PLIIx Movie:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1/7.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.
DOLBY D EX:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard 6.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 41 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
42
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
DOLBY D EX:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1 channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for Dolby Digital
sources.
MULTI
DTS:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard 5.1 channel processing for DTS and 96kHz/24-bit DTS sources.
DTS:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for DTS sources.
DTS+PLIIx Movie:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard 6.1/7.1 channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic IIx) for DTS sources.
DTS+PLIIx Movie:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1/7.1 channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic IIx) for DTS sources.
DTS+DOLBY EX:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard 6.1 channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources.
DTS+DOLBY EX:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1 channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources.
DTS ES Mtrx 6.1:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard 6.1 channel processing (DTS ES Matrix) for DTS sources.
DTS ES Mtrx 6.1:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced processing (DTS ES Matrix) for DTS sources.
DTS ES Dscrt 6.1:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard 6.1 channel processing (DTS ES Discrete) for DTS sources.
DTS ES Dscrt 6.1:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced processing (DTS ES Discrete) for DTS sources.
PRO LOGIC:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard processing for Dolby Surround sources.
2-CH
PRO LOGIC:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced precessing for Dolby Surround sources.
PRO LOGIC IIx:
PLIIx Movie
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie software.
PRO LOGIC II:
PLII Movie
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie software.
PRO LOGIC IIx:
PLIIx Game
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for game software.
PRO LOGIC II:
PLII Game
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for game software.
DTS: Neo:6 Cinema
DTS processing for movie software.
Program Features Sources
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 42 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
43
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
ADVANCED
OPERATION
You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc.
For music sources
Program Features Sources
CONCERT HALL
HiFi DSP processing. A classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 1700 seats.
Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which produce a very full,
rich sound.
MULTI
2-CH
JAZZ CLUB
HiFi DSP processing. This is the sound field at stage front in “The bottom Line”, a famous
New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering
a real and vibrant sound.
ROCK CONCERT
HiFi DSP processing. The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this
program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left
of the hall.
ENTERTAINMENT:
Disco
HiFi DSP processing. This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the
heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by high-
energy, “immediate” sound.
q D+PLIIx Music:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources.
MULTI
q D+PLIIx Music:
SUR. ENHANCED
DSP enhanced Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources.
DTS+PLIIx Music:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard DTS and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources.
DTS+PLIIx Music:
SUR. ENHANCED
DSP enhanced DTS and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources.
STEREO:
2ch Stereo
2 (left and right) channel playback.
2-CH
STEREO:
Direct Stereo
Use to output stereo sources to only the front left and right speakers without any processing.
STEREO:
7ch Stereo
Use to increase the output stereo sources (in stereo) from all speakers. This provides a larger
sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc.
PRO LOGIC IIx:
PLIIx Music
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music software.
PRO LOGIC II:
PLII Music
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for music software.
DTS: Neo:6 Music
DTS processing for music software.
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 43 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
ADVANCED OPERATIONS
44
You can display this unit’s operating information on a
video monitor. If you display the SET MENU and sound
field program parameter settings on a monitor, it is much
easier to see the available options and parameters than it is
by reading this information on the front panel display.
1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
2 Press ON SCREEN repeatedly to change the
OSD mode.
The OSD mode changes in the
following order: full display, short
display, and display off.
Full display
Always shows the sound field program parameter settings
as well as the contents of the front panel display.
Short display
Briefly shows the contents of the front panel display at the
bottom of the screen each time you operate this unit.
Display off
• The OSD signal is not output to the REC OUT jack, and will
not be recorded.
• You can set the OSD to turn on (gray background) or off when
a video source is not being reproduced (or the source
component is turned off) by using “Display set” (see page 56).
Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the
standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep
timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit
is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also
automatically turns off any external components
connected to the AC OUTLET(S).
■ Setting the sleep timer
1 Select a source and start playback on the
source component.
2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to
set the amount of time.
Each time you press SLEEP, the front
panel display changes as shown
below. The SLEEP indicator flashes
while switching the amount of time for sleep timer.
The “SLEEP” indicator lights up on the front panel
display after the sleep timer has been set.
ADVANCED OPERATIONS
Selecting the OSD mode
Notes
ON SCREEN
DISPLAY
P02
CONCERT
HALL
.DSPLEVEL;;;;0dB
INITDLY;;;;30ms
ROOMSIZE;;;;1.0
LIVENESS;;;;;;;5
P02CONCERTHALL
Full display Short display
Using the sleep timer
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
INPUT MODE
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
DTV
POWER POWER
AMP
AVTV
DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER
MULTI CH IN
CD
2
SLEEP
SLEEP 120 min. SLEEP 90 min.
SLEEP 60 min.SLEEP 30 min.SLEEP OFF
V–AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
PHONO
HiFi DSP
VOLUME
SLEEP
A
SP
LL R
SLEEP 120min
V–AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
PHONO
HiFi DSP
VOLUME
SLEEP
A
SP
LL R
CONCERT HALL
SLEEP Indicator
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 44 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
45
ADVANCED OPERATIONS
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Canceling the sleep timer
Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears on
the front panel display.
After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, and the
“SLEEP” indicator goes off.
y
The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing
STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the
front panel) to set this unit to the standby mode.
You can adjust the output level of each speaker while
listening to a music source. This is also possible when
playing sources through the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
Please note that this operation will override the level
adjustments made in “AUTO SETUP” (page 24),
“Speaker level” (page 50) and “Using the test tone”
(page 46).
1 Press AMP to select the AMP
mode.
2 Press LEVEL repeatedly to select
the speaker you want to adjust.
FRONT L Front left speaker level
CENTER Center speaker level
FRONT R Front right speaker level
SUR.R Surround right speaker level
SUR.B.R Surround back right speaker level
SUR.B.L Surround back left speaker level
SUR.L Surround left speaker level
SWFR Subwoofer level
PRES Presence speaker level
y
Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker by
pressing u / d.
3 Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level.
• The control range is from +10 dB to –10 dB.
When inputting digital signals with sampling frequencies higher
than 48 kHz, only the subwoofer level can be adjusted.
SLEEP
Manually adjusting speaker levels
Note
POWER
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
AUDI O
VOL
LEVEL
MENU
STRAIGHT
TEST
ON SCREEN
EFFECT
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
TITLE
MUTE
POWER
AMP
AVTV
+
+
+
–
–
–
1
3
2
AMP
TV INPUT
LEVEL
TITLE
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 45 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
46
ADVANCED OPERATIONS
You can use the test tone feature to manually balance your
speaker levels. Please note that this operation will override
the level adjustments made in “AUTO SETUP” (page 24),
“Speaker level” (page 50) and “Manually adjusting
speaker levels” (page 45). Use the test tone to set speaker
levels so that the volume from each speaker is identical
when heard from your listening position.
y
• Use a handheld SPL meter, hold at arms length and point
upwards so that the meter is in the listening position. With the
meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW, calibrate each
speaker to 75 dB.
• Before outputting the test tone, we recommend that you set the
output volume to 0 dB.
You cannot enter test mode if headphones are connected to the
PHONES jack. Remove the headphones from the PHONES jack.
1 Press AMP to select the AMP mode.
2 Press TEST.
The unit will output a test tone.
TEST LEFT Front left speaker
TEST CENTER Center speaker
TEST RIGHT Front right speaker
TEST R SUR. Right surround speaker
TEST R SUR. B Right surround back speaker
TEST L SUR. B Left surround back speaker
TEST L SUR. Left surround speaker
TEST SUBWOOFER Subwoofer
3 Press u / d repeatedly to select the speaker
you want to adjust.
4 Press j / i to adjust speaker volumes.
If you do not use the presence speakers
5 Press TEST when you have completed your
adjustment.
The test tone stops.
If PRESENCE is set to YES, press TEST twice to stop the test
tone.
If you use the presence speakers
5 Press TEST.
The unit will output a test tone.
TEST FRONT Front speakers
TEST PRESENCE Presence speakers
TEST PRES L Presence left speaker
TEST PRES R Presence right speaker
6 Press u / d repeatedly to select the speaker
you want to adjust.
7 Press j / i to adjust speaker volumes.
8 Press TEST when you have completed your
adjustment.
The test tone stops.
Using the test tone
Note
POWER
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
AUDI O
VOL
LEVEL
MENU
STRAIGHT
TEST
ON SCREEN
EFFECT
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
TITLE
MUTE
POWER
AMP
AVTV
+
+
+
–
–
–
1
3
2,5
4
Note
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 46 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
SET MENU
47
ADVANCED
OPERATION
You can use the following parameters in the set menu to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this
unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening
environment.
■ Auto Setup
Use to specify which speaker parameters auto setup will adjust, and to activate the auto setup procedure (see page 24).
■ Manual Setup
Use to manually adjust speaker and system settings.
y
Most of the parameters described in the SOUND menu are set automatically when you run auto setup (see page 24). You can use the
SOUND menu to make further adjustments, but we recommend running auto setup first.
Basic menu
Use to quickly setup basic system parameters (see page 28).
Sound menu
Use to manually adjust any speaker setting or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors
or projectors.
Input menu
Use to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input mode, rename your inputs, or specify external input settings.
SET MENU
Item Features Page
SPEAKER SET
Selects the output mode suitable for each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output,
and the cross over frequency.
49
SP LEVEL
Adjusts the output level of each speaker.
50
SP DISTANCE
Adjusts the delay time of each speaker.
51
GRAPHIC EQ
Adjusts the tonal quality of each speaker.
51
LFE LEVEL
Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
51
DYNAMIC RANGE
Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
52
LOW FRQ. TEST
Matches the subwoofer level with the level of the other speakers.
52
HP TONE CTRL
Adjusts the tonal balance of the headphones.
53
AUDIO SET
Customizes overall audio settings of this unit.
53
PR/SBch SELECT
Selects priority to either surround back or presence speakers when both sets of speakers are
connected to this unit.
53
Item Features Page
I/O ASSIGN
Assigns jacks according to the component to be used.
54
INPUT MODE
Selects the initial input mode of the source.
54
INPUT RENAME
Changes the name of the inputs.
55
EXT.INPUT
Sets the direction of the signals input into the center, subwoofer and surround channels for the
source component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
55
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 47 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
48
SET MENU
Option menu
Use to adjust the optional system settings.
Use the remote control to access and adjust each
parameter.
1 Press AMP to select the AMP
mode.
2 Press u / d to select AUTO SETUP or
MANUAL SETUP, then press j / i to enter the
selected category.
If u is pressed when AUTO SETUP is selected, or if d is
pressed when MANUAL SETUP is selected, SET MENU
will be closed. Press u / d to open SET MENU again.
3 Press u / d repeatedly to select a menu,
then press j / i to enter the menu item.
Repeat this operation to navigate to and enter the
setup mode of the item you want to adjust.
4 Press j / i repeatedly to change the setting of
the item you want to adjust.
5 To exit, press u / d repeatedly until the
menu disappears or just press one of the
sound field program group buttons.
Item Features Page
DISPLAY SET
Adjusts the OSD and converts video signals.
56
MEMORY GUARD
Locks sound field program parameters and other SET MENU settings.
56
PARAM. INI
Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs.
57
SP IMP. SET
Selects the impedance of your speakers.
57
ZONE SET
Specifies the location of the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals.
57
ZONE2 SET
Selects the Zone 2 mode.
58
Using SET MENU
POWER
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
AUDI O
VOL
LEVEL
MENU
STRAIGHT
STEREO
ENTERTAIN
NIGHT
MOVIE
THX
/DTS
TEST
ON SCREEN
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
HALL
CHCH
JAZZ
ROCK
TITLE
MUTE
POWER
AMP
AVTV
+
+
+
–
–
–
3421
5
90
+
10
ENTER
67 8
MUSIC TV THTR
EX/ES
1
2,3,5
5
2,3,4
AMP
SET MENU
. ;AUTO SETUP
;MANUAL SETUP
: Up/Down
p
/
p
: Select
-/+
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
then
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.
However, if the power cord is disconnected from the
AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one
week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the
items again.
or
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
STEREO
ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR
NIGHT
EX/ES
MOVIE
THX /DTS
CHP/INDEX
HALL
JAZZ
ROCK
3421
5
90
+10 ENTER
67 8
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 48 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
49
SET MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Use to manually adjust any speaker setting or compensate
for video signal processing delays when using LCD
monitors or projectors. Most of the SOUND parameters
are set automatically when you run auto setup (see
page 24).
■ Speaker set SPEAKER SET
Use to manually adjust any speaker setting.
Set any THX speakers to SMALL.
MANUAL SETUP > SOUND MENU > SPEAKER SET >
Center speaker CENTER SP
Choices: LARGE, SMALL, NONE
• Select LARGE if you have a large center speaker. The
unit directs the entire range of the center channel signal
to the center speaker.
• Select SMALL if you have a small center speaker. The
unit directs the low-frequency signals of the center
channel to the speakers selected with “BASS OUT”.
• Select NONE if you do not have a center speaker. The
unit directs all of the center channel signal to the front
left and right speakers.
Front speakers FRONT SP
Choices: LARGE, SMALL
• Select LARGE if you have large front speakers. The
unit directs the entire range of the front left and right
channel signals to the front left and right speakers.
• Select SMALL if you have small front speakers. The
unit directs the low-frequency signals of the front
channel to the speakers selected with “BASS OUT”.
Surround left/right speakers SURR L/R SP
Choices: LARGE, SMALL, NONE
• Select LARGE if you have large surround left and right
speakers or if a rear subwoofer is connected to the
surround speakers. The entire range of the surround
channel signal is directed to the surround left and right
speakers.
• Select SMALL if you have small surround left and
right speakers. The low-frequency signals of the
surround channel are directed to the speakers selected
with “BASS OUT”.
• Select NONE if you do not have surround speakers.
This will set the unit to the Virtual CINEMA DSP
mode (see page 34) and automatically set the surround
back speaker setting (SURR B L/R SP below) to
NONE.
Surround back left/right speakers
SURR B L/R SP
Choices: LRGx2, LRGx1, SMLx2, SMLx1, NONE
• Select LRGx2 if you have 2 large surround back
speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the
surround back channel signal to the surround back
speakers.
• Select LRGx1 if you have a large surround back
speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the
surround back channel signal to the left surround back
speaker.
• Select SMLx2 if you have 2 small surround back
speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround
back channels are directed to the speakers selected with
“BASS OUT”.
• Select SMLx1 if you have a small surround back
speaker. The low-frequency signals of the surround
back channel are directed to the speakers selected with
“BASS OUT”, and the rest of the frequency signals are
directed to the left surround back speaker.
• Select NONE if you do not have a surround back
speaker. The unit directs all of the surround back
channel signal to the surround left and right speakers.
If you select LRGx1 or SMLx1, connect a speaker to the left
SURROUND BACK speaker terminals.
Manual setup: SOUND
Note
. A)SPEAKERSET
B)SPEAKERLEVEL
C)SPDISTANCE
D)GRAFICEQ
: Up/Down
p
/
p
: Select
-/+
2 SOUND
MENU
NONE [SML LRG
CENTER SP
[SMALL LARGE
FRONT SP
Note
NONE [SML LRG
SURR L/R SP
SWLx1 [SMLx2
SURR B L/R SP
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 49 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
50
SET MENU
Presence speakers PRESENCE SP
Choices: NONE, YES
• Select YES if you have presence speakers.
• Select NONE if you do not have presence speakers.
LFE/bass out LFE/BASS OUT
LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit
decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. The Low-
frequency signals can be directed to both front left and
right speakers, and to the subwoofer (subwoofer can be
used for both stereo reproduction and the sound field
program).
Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), FRNT, BOTH
THX recommendation: SWFR
• Select SWFR if you connect a subwoofer. The unit
directs all LFE and low-frequency signals to the
subwoofer.
• Select FRNT if you do not connect a subwoofer. The
unit directs all low-frequency and LFE signals to the
front speakers (even if you have previously set FRONT
SP to SMALL).
• Select BOTH to direct LFE signals to the subwoofer.
Other low-frequency signals are directed to both the
subwoofer and the other front channels in accordance
with your other speaker settings.
Cross over CROSS OVER
Use this feature to select a cross-over (cut-off) frequency
for all low-frequency signals. All frequencies below the
selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer.
Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,
120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz
THX recommendation: 80Hz
■ Speaker level SP LEVEL
Use these settings to manually balance the speaker levels
between the front left or surround left speakers and each
speaker selected in SPEAKER SET (page 49).
MANUAL SETUP > SOUND MENU > SP LEVEL >
Choices: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
• FR adjusts the balance of the front left and front right
speakers.
• C adjusts the balance of the front left and center
speakers.
• SL adjusts the balance of the front left and surround
left speakers.
• SBL* adjusts the balance of the surround left and
surround back left speakers.
• SBR* adjusts the balance of the surround left and
surround back right speakers.
• SR adjusts the balance of the surround left and
surround right speakers.
• SWFR adjusts the balance of the front left speaker and
subwoofer.
• PRES adjusts the balance of the front and presence
speakers.
*
SB will be displayed if you selected only one surround back
speaker in SURR B L/R SP (page 49).
y
Use a handheld SPL meter, hold at arms length and point upwards
so that the meter is in the listening position. With the meter set to
the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW, calibrate each speaker to 75 dB.
NONE [YES
PRESENCE SP
[SWFR FRNT BOTH
LFE/BASS OUT
FREQ;;;80Hz(THX)
CROSS OVER
-+
. FR
C
SL
B)SPEAKER
LEVEL
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 50 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
51
SET MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Speaker distance SP DISTANCE
Use this feature to manually input the distance of each
speaker and adjust the delay applied to respective channel.
Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the
main listening position. However, this is not possible in
most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay
must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all
sound will arrive at the listening position at the same time.
To access these parameters, select:
MANUAL SETUP > SOUND MENU > SP DISTANCE >
Unit UNIT
Choices: meters (m), feet (ft)
Initial setting:
U.S.A. and Canada models: feet (ft)
Other models: meters (m)
• Select meters to input speaker distances in meters.
• Select feet to input speaker distances in feet.
Speaker distances
Choices: 0.3 to 24.00 m (1 to 80 ft)
• FRONT L adjusts the distance of the front left speaker.
Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)
• FRONT R adjusts the distance of the front right
speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)
• CENTER adjusts the distance of the center speaker.
Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)
• SURR L adjusts the distance of the surround left
speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)
• SURR R adjusts the distance of the surround right
speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)
• SB adjusts the distance of the surround back left
speakers. Initial setting: 2.10 m (7.0 ft)
• SWFR adjusts the distance of the subwoofer. Initial
setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)
■ Graphic equalizer GRAPHIC EQ
Use this feature to select parametric (PEQ) or graphic
equalizer (GEQ).
To access these parameters, select:
MANUAL SETUP > SOUND MENU > GRAPHIC EQ >
Equalizer select EQ SELECT
Choices: PEQ, GEQ
• Select PEQ to use the equalizer adjusted in auto setup.
• Select GEQ to adjust the built-in 7-band graphic
equalizer so that the center, surround L/R and surround
back L/R speakers tonal quality matches that of the left
and right front speakers.
Choices: –6 to +6 (dB)
You can adjust 7 frequency bands: 63Hz, 160Hz, 400Hz,
1kHz, 2.5kHz, 6.3kHz, 16kHz
■ Low-frequency effect level LFE LEVEL
Use to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency
effect) channel according to the capacity of your
subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries low-
frequency special effects which are only added to certain
scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit
decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
To access these parameters, select:
MANUAL SETUP > SOUND MENU > LFE LEVEL
Choices: –20 to 0 (dB)
Speaker SPEAKER
Select to adjust the speaker LFE level.
Headphone HEADPHONE
Select to adjust the headphone LFE level.
Depending on the settings of LFE LEVEL, some signals may not
be output from the SUBWOOFER jack.
. UNIT;;;;;;meters
FRONTL;;;;2.30m
FRONTR;;;;2.30m
CENTER;;;;;2.00m
: Up/Down
p
/
p
: Adjust
-/+
C)SP
DISTANCE
Note
. CHANNEL;;FRONT L
-+
63Hz 0dB
160Hz 0dB
400Hz 0dB
1kHz 0dB
2.5kHz 0dB
6.3kHz 0dB
16kHz 0dB
D)GRAPHIC
EQ
. SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB
HEADPHONE;;;;0dB
/ : Up/Down
p
p
-/+ : Adjust
E)LFE
LEVEL
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 51 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
52
SET MENU
■ Dynamic range DYNAMIC RANGE
Use to select the amount of dynamic range compression to
be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is
effective only when the unit is decoding Dolby Digital and
DTS signals.
To access these parameters, select:
MANUAL SETUP > SOUND MENU > DYNAMIC
RANGE >
Choices: MIN (minimum), STD (standard),
MAX (maximum)
SP
Select to adjust the speaker compression.
HP
Select to adjust the headphone compression.
• Select MAX for feature films.
• Select STD for general use.
• Select MIN for listening to sources at low volume
levels.
■ Low frequency test LOW FRQ. TEST
Use this feature to adjust the output level of the subwoofer
so it matches your other speakers.
To access these parameters, select:
MANUAL SETUP > SOUND MENU >
LOW FRQ. TEST >
1 Press j / i to set TEST TONE to ON, and
adjust the volume with VOL –/+ so you can
hear the tone.
Do not turn up the volume too high. If no test tone is
heard, turn down the volume, set this unit in the
standby mode and make sure all the necessary
connections are correct.
• The tone generator produces a narrow-band noise
centered on a specified frequency by the band pass
filter besides a wide-band noise.
2 Press d to go to “OUTPUT” and press j / i to
select the speaker you want to compare with
the subwoofer.
Choices: FRONT L/R, FRONT L, CENTER,
FRONT R, SUR.R, SBR*, SBL*, SUR.L, SWFR,
PRESENCE
* SB will be displayed if you selected only one surround
back speaker in SURR B L/R SP (page 49).
3 Press d to go to “FRQ” and press j / i to
select the frequency you want to use.
Choices: 35 to 250 (Hz), Initial: 88 Hz
4 Adjust the volume of the subwoofer with the
controls on the subwoofer so it matches that
of the speaker you are comparing it to.
y
You can use the test tone not only for adjusting the subwoofer
level, but also for checking the low-frequency characteristics of
your listening room. Low-frequency sounds are especially
affected by the listener’s position, speaker placement, subwoofer
polarity and other conditions.
. SP: MIN STD[MAX
HP: MIN STD[MAX
/ : Up/Down
p
p
-/+ : Adjust
F)DYNAMIC RANGE
/ : Up/Down
p
p
-/+ : Adjust
. TEST_TONE;;;;OFF
OUTPUT;FRONT L/R
FRQ;;;;;;;;;88Hz
G)LOW FRQ.TEST
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 52 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
53
SET MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Headphone tone control HP TONE CTRL
Use to adjust the amount of bass and treble output to your
headphones.
To access these parameters, select:
MANUAL SETUP > SOUND MENU > HP TONE CTRL
>
• Use BASS to adjust the headphone bass level.
• Use TRBL to adjust the headphone treble level.
Choices: –6 to +6 (dB), Initial: 0 dB
■ Audio set AUDIO SET
Use to customize this units overall audio settings.
To access these parameters, select:
MANUAL SETUP > SOUND MENU > AUDIO SET
Mute MUTE
Use to adjust how much the mute function reduces the
output volume.
Choices: MUTE, –20 dB
• Select MUTE to completely halt all output of sound.
•Select
–20 dB to reduce the current volume by 20 dB.
Delay DELAY
Use to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the
video image. This may be necessary when using certain
LCD monitors or projectors.
Choices: 0 to 240 (ms)
Dialog lift DIALG.LIFT
Use to turn on/off the DIALG.LIFT parameter (see
page 76). This parameter adjusts the height of the front
and center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.) by
assigning some of the front and center channel elements to
the presence speakers.
Choices: ON, OFF
• Select ON to turn on DIALG.LIFT effect.
• Select OFF to turn off DIALG.LIFT effect.
DIALG.LIFT appears only when PRESENCE is set to YES
(see page 28).
■ Presence/surround back channel select
PR/SBch SELECT
You can select to prioritize either the surround back or
presence speakers when playing sources that contain
surround back channel signals using CINEMA DSP sound
field programs.
MANUAL SETUP > SOUND MENU > PR/SBch SELECT
>
Choices: PRch, SBch
• Select SBch to use surround back speakers when a
surround back channel signal is detected in a CINEMA
DSP program. Presence channel signals will be output
from front speakers.
• Select PRch to use presence speakers even when
surround back channel signals are input. The signals
for the surround back channel will be output from
surround speakers.
Note
. BASS
TRBL
-+
0dB
/ : Up/Down
-/+ : Adjust
H)HP TONE
CTRL
/ : Exit
p
p
-/+ : Select
. AUDIO MUTE;;MUTE
AUDIO DELAY;;0ms
DIALG.LIFT;;;OFF
I)AUDIO SET
/ : Exit
p
p
-/+ : Select
PRch [SBch
J)PR/SBch SELECT
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 53 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
54
SET MENU
■ Input/output assignment I/O ASSIGN
You can assign jacks according to the component to be
used if this unit’s initial settings do not correspond to your
needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the
respective jacks and effectively connect more
components.
Once the inputs have been reassigned, you can select the
corresponding component by using INPUT on the front
panel or the input selector buttons on the remote control.
MANUAL SETUP > INPUT MENU > I/O ASSIGN >
y
The default settings are displayed with parentheses on the OSD.
CMPNT-V IN for COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
jacks [A] and [B]
Choices: DVD, V-AUX, DVR/VCR 2, VCR 1, CBL/SAT,
DTV, CD-R
OPTICAL OUT for OPTICAL OUTPUT jacks (1)
and (2)
Choices: MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, V-AUX,
DVR/VCR 2, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, DTV, DVD
OPTICAL IN for OPTICAL INPUT jacks (3), (4), (5)
and (6)
Choices: CD, PHONO, DVR/VCR 2, VCR 1, CBL/SAT,
DTV, DVD, MD/TAPE, CD-R
COAXIAL IN for COAXIAL INPUT jacks (7), (8) and
(9)
Choices: CD, PHONO, V-AUX, DVR/VCR 2, VCR 1,
CBL/SAT, DTV, DVD, MD/TAPE, CD-R
• You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same
type of jack.
• When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and
OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the
COAXIAL jack.
■ Input mode INPUT MODE
Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources
connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn
on this unit (see page 34 for details about the input mode).
MANUAL SETUP > INPUT MENU > INPUT MODE >
Choices: AUTO, LAST
• Select AUTO to allow this unit to automatically detect
the type of input signal and select the appropriate input
mode.
• Select LAST to set this unit to automatically select the
last input mode used for that source.
Even if LAST is selected, the last setting for the EX/ES button
will not be recalled.
Manual setup: INPUT
. A)I/OASSIGNMENT
B)INPUTMODE
C)INPUTRENAME
D)EXT.INPUT
: Up/Down
p
/
p
: Select
-/+
3 INPUT
MENU
. [A];;;;; DVD
( DVD )
[B];;;;; DTV
(DTV)
CMPNT-V
INPUT
. (1);;;;;MD/TAPE
(MD/TAPE )
(2);;;;; CD-R
(CD-R)
OPTICAL
OUT
Notes
Note
. (3);;;;; CD
(CD)
(4);;;;; DVD
(DVD )
(5);;;;; DTV
(DTV )
OPTICAL
IN
. (7);;;;; CD
(CD)
(8);;;;; DVD
(DVD )
(9);;;;;DVR/VCR2
(DVR/VCR2)
COAXIAL
IN
/ : Exit
p
p
-/+ : Select
AUTO [LAST
B)INPUT MODE
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 54 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
55
SET MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Input rename INPUT RENAME
Use this feature to change the name of the inputs on the
OSD and front panel display.
MANUAL SETUP > INPUT MENU > INPUT RENAME
>
1 Press an input selector button to select the
input you want to change the name of.
2 Press j / i to place the _ (under-bar) under
the space or the character you want to edit.
3 Press u / d to select the character you want
to use and j / i to move to the next one.
• You can use up to 8 characters for each input.
• Press d to change the character in the following
order, or press u to go in the reverse order:
A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, #, *,
+, etc.
• Repeat steps 1 to 3 to rename each input.
4 Press i repeatedly to exit from INPUT
RENAME.
■ External input EXT.INPUT
Use this feature to set the direction of the signals input
into the center, subwoofer and surround channels when
the source component is connected to the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks. If you are inputting 8-channel signals from
an external decoder, use this feature to select jacks for the
additional front signals.
MANUAL SETUP > INPUT MENU > EXT.INPUT >
6ch/8ch
This setting is used to select the number of channels input
from an external decoder.
Choices: 6ch
, 8ch
FRONT
If you selected 8ch, you can select analog audio jacks to
which front signals from an external decoder will be input.
Choices: DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2,
MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, V-AUX
CENTER
Use to select where the signals input to the CENTER jack
will be output.
Choices: CENTER, FRONT
• Select CENTER to output the signals from the center
speaker.
• Select FRONT to output the signals from the front left
and right speakers.
SWFR
Use to select where the signals input to the SUBWOOFER
jack will be output.
Choices: SWFR, FRONT
• Select SWFR to output the signals from the subwoofer.
• Select FRONT to output the signals from the front left
and right speakers.
SL/SR
Use to select where the signals input to the SURROUND
jacks will be output.
Choices: SL/SR, FRONT
• Select SL/SR to output the signals from the surround
speakers.
• Select FRONT to output the signals from the front left
and right speakers.
-/+ : Position
p
p
/ : Character
CD -> CD
C)INPUT RENAME
.[6CH 8CH
(FRNT/SB-> FRNT)
CENTER ->CENTER
SWFR -> SWFR
SL/SR -> SL/SR
( --- -> SB )
-/+ Select
/ : Up/Down
D)EXT.INPUT
p
p
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 55 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
56
SET MENU
■ Display set DISPLAY SET
MANUAL SETUP > OPTION MENU > DISPLAY SET >
Dimmer DIMMER
Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display.
Choices: –4 to 0
OSD shift OSD SHIFT
Use to adjust the vertical position of the OSD.
Choices: +5 (downward) to –5 (upward)
• Press + to lower the position of the OSD.
• Press – to raise the position of the OSD.
Gray back GRAY BACK
Selecting AUTO for the on-screen display setting displays
a gray background when there’s no video signal input.
Nothing is displayed if OFF is selected.
Choices: AUTO, OFF
If “GRAY BACK” is set to OFF, no information will be
displayed on the screen when video signals are not being input.
Video conversion V CONV.
Use this feature to turn on/off the conversion of composite
signals to both S-video and component signals. This
allows you to output coverted video signals from the S-
video jack or the component video jack when no S-video
or component signals are input. This feature also converts
S-video signals to component signals when no component
signals are input.
Choices: ON, OFF
• Select OFF not to convert any signals.
• Select ON to convert composite signals to S-video and
component signals, and to convert S-video signals to
component signals.
• Converted video signals are only output to the MONITOR OUT
jacks. When recording you must make the same type of video
connections (composite or S-video) between each component.
• When converting S-video signals from a VCR to component
video signals, the picture quality may suffer depending on your
VCR.
Component OSD CMPNT OSD
Use this feature to turn on/off OSD output to the
COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks when
using the set menu, test tone or parameter functions.
Choices: ON, OFF
• Select ON to output the OSD signals from
COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks.
• Select OFF if you do not want to output the OSD
signals from COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT
jacks.
Set menu functions even when OFF is selected.
■ Memory guard MEMORY GUARD
Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP
program parameter values and other system settings.
MANUAL SETUP > OPTION MENU > MEMORY
GUARD >
Choices: ON, OFF
Select ON to protect:
• DSP program parameters
• All SET MENU items
• All speaker levels
• The on-screen display (OSD) mode
When MEMORY GUARD is set to ON, you cannot use
the test tone or select any other SET MENU items.
Manual setup: OPTION
Note
. A)DISPLAYSET
B)MEMORYGUARD
C)PARAM.INI
D)ZONESET
: Up/Down
p
/
p
: Select
-/+
4
OPTION
MENU
/ : Up/Down
p
p
-/+ : Select
. DIMMER;;;;;;;;;0
OSD SHIFT;;;;;;0
GRAY BACK;;;AUTO
V CONV.;;;;;;;ON
CMPNT OSD;;;;OFF
A)DISPLAY SET
Notes
Note
/ : Exit
p
p
-/+ : Select
[OFF ON
B)MEMORY GUARD
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 56 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
57
SET MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Parameter initialization PARAM. INI
Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each sound
field
program within a sound field program group. When
you initialize a sound
field program group, all of the
parameter values within that group revert to their initial
settings.
MANUAL SETUP > OPTION MENU > PARAM. INI >
Press the corresponding numeric button for the sound
field
program that you want to initialize.
An asterisk (*) next to a program number means that the
parameter values have been changed from their initial
settings.
• You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter
settings once you initialize a
sound field program group.
• You cannot separately initialize individual
sound field
programs.
• You cannot initialize any program groups when MEMORY
GUARD is set to ON.
■ Speaker impedance setting SP IMP.SET
Use to select the impedance of your speakers.
MANUAL SETUP > OPTION MENU > SP IMP.SET >
Choices: 6ohms, 8ohms
■ Zone set ZONE SET
Use to specify the location of speakers connected the
SPEAKERS B terminals.
MANUAL SETUP > OPTION MENU > ZONE SET >
SP B
Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers
connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals.
Choices: FRONT, ZONE B
• Select FRONT to turn on/off SPEAKERS A and B
when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B
terminals are set in the main room.
• Select ZONE B if the speakers connected to the
SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another room. If
SPEAKERS A is turned OFF and SPEAKERS B is
turned ON, all the speakers including the subwoofer in
the main room are muted and the unit outputs sound
from SPEAKERS B only.
• If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack on the unit, the
sound is output from both headphones and SPEAKERS B.
• When a DSP program is selected, the unit automatically enters
the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode.
Notes
123*4
*5678
9 *0 +10
C)PARAM. INI
/ : Exit
p
p
-/+ : Select
Minimum 8ohms
D)SP IMP.SET
Notes
/ : Exit
p
p
-/+ : Select
SP_B;;;;;;FRONT
E)ZONE SET
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 57 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
58
SET MENU
■ Zone 2 set ZONE2 SET
(U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only)
MANUAL SETUP > OPTION MENU > ZONE2 SET >
Output volume OUTPUT VOL
Use to select how the volume control will operate with
regard to the ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks.
Choices: VAR., FIX
• Select VAR. to adjust the ZONE 2 volume using the
remote control.
• Select FIX to fix the ZONE 2 OUTPUT volume level
to a standard line level.
Zone 2 amplifier ZONE2 AMP
Use to select how the ZONE 2 speakers will be amplified.
Choices: ON, OFF
• Select OFF if you do not use Zone 2 speakers or if you
connect your Zone 2 speakers through an external
amplifiers connected to this unit’s ZONE 2 OUTPUT
jacks.
• Select ON to use this unit’s internal amplifier if you
connect your Zone 2 speakers directly to this unit’s
PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals.
/ : Up/Down
p
p
-/+ : Select
OUTPUT VOL;;VAR.
ZONE2 AMP;;;OFF
F)ZONE2 SET
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 58 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
59
ADVANCED
OPERATION
In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other A/V components made by YAMAHA and
other manufacturers. To control other components, you must set up remote control with the appropriate manufacturer
codes.
This remote control also has a learn feature which allows the remote to acquire functions from other remote controls
equipped with an infrared remote control transmitter.
■ Controlling this unit
The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit
when the AMP mode is selected. Press AMP to select the
AMP mode.
y
You can set the remote so that the shaded areas always control
this unit. This is useful, for example, if you always want to use
the numeric buttons to select this unit’s sound fields instead of for
controlling the selected component (DVD, CD, MD, etc.). To
activate this mode, hold down AMP for at least 3 seconds so that
“A:__” (i.e., “A:DVD”) appears in the display window. To
cancel, repeat so that only the selected component (i.e., “DVD”)
is displayed.
■ Controlling other components
The shaded areas below can be used to control other
components. Each button has a different function
depending on the selected components. Select the
component you want to control by pressing an input
selector button or SELECT k/n. The name of the selected
component appears in the display window.
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Control area
MUSIC TV THTR
EX/ES
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
INPUT MODE
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
DTV
POWER
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
VOL
LEVEL
MENU
STRAIGHT
STEREO
ENTERTAIN
NIGHT
MOVIE
MOVIE
/DTS
TEST
ON SCREEN
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
HALL
CHCH
JAZZ
ROCK
TITLE
MUTE
POWER
AMP
AVTV
DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER
MULTI CH IN
CD
+
+
+
–
–
–
3421
5
90
+10 ENTER
67 8
MUSIC
VIDEO
TV
THEATER
EX/ES
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
INPUT MODE
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
DTV
POWER
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
VOL
LEVEL
MENU
STEREO
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
SELECT
0
+
10
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
TEST
ON SCREEN
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHURCH
CHCH
JAZZ CLUB
ROCK
CONCERT
TITLE
MUTE
POWER
AMP
AVTV
DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER
MULTI CH IN
CD
+
+
+
–
–
–
3421
5
910
11 12
67 8
POWER
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
LEVEL
MENU
STEREO
ENTERTAIN
NIGHT
MOVIE
THX /DTS
TEST
ON SCREEN
CHP/INDEX
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
HALL
CHCH
JAZZ
ROCK
TITLE
POWER
AVTV
+
+
–
–
3421
5
90
+10 ENTER
67 8
MUSIC TV THTR
EX/ES
Input selector buttons
switch the component
control area.
Component
control area
You can control up to 11
different components by
setting appropriate
manufacturer codes (see
page 64).
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 59 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
60
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
You can control other components by setting the
appropriate manufacturer codes. Codes can be set up for
each input area.
The following table shows the factory preset component
(Library: component category) and the manufacturer code
for each area.
You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even
if a YAMAHA manufacturer code is initially set as listed above.
In this case, try to set other YAMAHA manufacturer code(s).
1 Press an input selector button to select the
source component you want to set up.
2 Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds
using a ballpoint pen or similar object.
“SETUP” and the selected component name appear
alternately in the display window.
Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3
seconds, otherwise the learning process will start.
y
Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds.
Otherwise, the learning mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, press LEARN again.
If you want to change a library (component
category), press j / i. You can set a different
type of component.
Library choices: L:DVD, L:LD, L:CD, L:CDR,
L:MD, L:TAP (tape), L:TUN, L:AMP*, L:TV,
L:CAB (cable), L:DBS, L:SAT, L:VCR
* The amplifier Library (L:AMP) code is preset to “YPC”
to operate this unit. However, you can switch between the
following two codes if necessary.
• The initial setting for “Amplifier library” is “YPC”.
YPC To operate this unit.
ZONE (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only)
To operate ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 features.
3 Press u / d to select the name of your
component’s manufacturer.
You will find the names of most worldwide audio-
video manufacturers in alphabetical order in the
display window.
4 Press one of the buttons shaded below to
see if you can control your component. If you
can, the manufacturer code is correct.
y
• If the manufacturer of your component has more than one
codes, try each of them until you find the correct one.
• If you continuously want to set up another code for
another component, press TV MUTE/SELECT and repeat
steps 1, 3 and 4.
Setting manufacturer codes
Input area
Component
category
(Library)
Manufacturer
PHONO TV –
TUNER TUNER YAMAHA-1
CD CD YAMAHA-1
V-AUX VCR –
CBL/SAT CABLE –
MD/TAPE MD YAMAHA-1
CD-R CD-R YAMAHA
DTV TV –
VCR 1 VCR –
DVR/VCR2 VCR –
DVD DVD YAMAHA-1
Note
TUNERPHONO
V
-
AUX
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
CD
MULTI CH IN
LEARN
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
POWER
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
VOL
LEVEL
MENU
TV VOL
TITLE
MUTE
POWER
AMP
AVTV
+
+
–
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 60 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
61
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
5 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup
mode.
• The supplied remote control does not contain all possible
manufacturer codes for commercially available AV components
(including YAMAHA AV components). If operation is not
possible with any of the manufacturer codes, program the new
remote control function with the Learn feature (see below) or
use the remote control supplied with the component.
• If you have already programmed a remote control function for a
button, the function by learning programming takes priority
over the setup manufacturer code’s function.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window when press any
buttons other than indicated in each step, or when you press
more than one button at once.
If you want to program functions not included in the basic
operations covered by the manufacturer code, or an
appropriate manufacturer code is not available, do the
following. You can program any of the buttons available
in the component control area (see page 59). The buttons
can be programmed independently for each component.
This remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote
control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn most
of its functions. However, you may not be able to program some
special signals or extremely long transmissions. (Refer to the
operation instructions for the other remote control.)
1 Press an input selector button to select a
source component.
2 Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm
apart from the other remote control on a flat
surface so that their infrared transmitters are
aimed at each other.
3 Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar
object.
Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down
for more than three seconds, the remote enters the
manufacturer code setting mode.
y
Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds.
Otherwise, the learning mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, press LEARN again.
4 Press the button at which you want to
program the new function.
“LEARN” is displayed.
Notes
Programming codes from other
remote controls
Note
LEARN
TUNERPHONO
V
-
AUX
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
CD
MULTI CH IN
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
INPUT MODE
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
DTV
POWER POWER
AMP
AVTV
DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER
MULTI CH IN
CD
5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 inches)
Flashes alternately
LEARN
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
INPUT MODE
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
DTV
POWER
REC
DISC SKIP
AUDI O
VOL
POWER
AMP
AVTV
DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER
MULTI CH IN
CD
+
–
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 61 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
62
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
5 Press and hold the button you want to
program on the other remote control until
“OK” appears in the display window.
• “NG” appears in the display window if programming was
unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 5.
• This remote control can learn approximately 120 functions.
However depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may
appear in the display before you program 120 functions. In this
case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room
for further learning.
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to program additional
functions.
7 Press LEARN again to exit from the learning
mode.
• Learning may not be possible in the following cases:
– When the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other
components are weak.
– When the distance between the two remote controls is too
great or too small.
– When the remote control infrared windows are not facing at
the appropriate angle.
– When the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight.
– When the function to be programmed is continuous or
uncommon.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press more
than one button at the same time.
You can change the name that appears in the display
window on the remote control if you want to use the
different name than the factory preset. This is useful when
you have set the input selector to control a different
component.
1 Press an input selector button to select the
source component you want to rename.
The selected component name appears in the display
window.
2 Press RE-NAME using a
ballpoint pen or similar
object.
3 Press u / d to select and enter a character.
Pressing d changes the character as follows:
A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, space, -(hyphen), and /(slash).
(Pressing u changes the characters in reverse order.)
4 Press j / i to move the cursor to the next
position.
y
If you want to continue setting up names for other
components, press TV MUTE/SELECT and repeat steps 1,
3 and 4.
5 Press RE-NAME again to exit from the
renaming mode.
Notes
Notes
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
INPUT MODE
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
DTV
POWER POWER
AMP
AVTV
DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER
MULTI CH IN
CD
LEARN
Changing source names in the
display window
TUNERPHONO
V
-
AUX
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
CD
MULTI CH IN
RE-NAME
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
RE-NAME
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 62 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
63
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
You can clear all changes made in each function set, such
as learned functions, renamed source names and setup
manufacturer codes.
1 Press CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
y
Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds. Other
wise, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In
this case, press CLEAR again.
2 Press u / d to select the clear mode.
L:DVD
(L: name of a component)
Clears all learned functions in the respective
component control area. Press an input selector
button to select the component.
L:AMP Clears all learned functions for this unit’s control
area.
L:ALL Clears all learned functions.
RNAME Clears all renamed source names.
FCTRY Clears all remote functions and returns the remote
to the factory settings.
3 Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3
seconds.
“C:OK” appears in the display window.
“C:NG” appears in the display window if the operation is
unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 2.
4 Press CLEAR to exit from the clearing mode.
Once you have cleared a learned function for a
button, the button reverts to the factory setting.
“ERROR” appears in the display window under the following
circumstances:
– When a button other than the cursor is pressed.
– When more than one button is pressed at once.
■ Clearing a learned function
You can clear the function learned in a certain
programmed button in each area.
1 Press an input selector button to select the
source component containing the function
you want to clear.
The selected component name appears in the display
window.
2 Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar
object.
“LEARN” and the selected component name appear
alternately in the display window.
y
Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds.
Otherwise the learning mode will be automatically canceled.
In this case, press LEARN again.
3 Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen
or similar object, then press the button you
want to clear for about 3 seconds.
“C:OK” appears in the display window.
When you clear a learned function, the button reverts
to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if
you have set manufacturer codes).
4 Repeat step 3 to clear other learned
functions.
5 Press LEARN again to exit.
Clearing function sets
Note
Note
CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR
Clearing individual functions
TUNERPHONO
V
-
AUX
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
CD
MULTI CH IN
LEARN
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
INPUT MODE
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER
MULTI CH IN
CD
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 63 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
64
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Once you set the appropriate manufacturer codes, you can use this remote to control your other components. Note that
some buttons may not correctly operate the selected component. Use the input selector buttons to select the component
you want to operate. The remote control automatically switches to the appropriate control mode for that component.
y
• To control a component without changing the receiver’s input mode, use SELECT k/n to select the component.
• TV POWER, TV VOL –/+, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE will operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code for
your TV is set up in the DTV areas. If a component other than TV is set up in the DTV area, you can control your TV by setting up
your TV in the PHONO area. If your TV is set up in both the DTV and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV area.
■ Operating a DVD player (DVD area) ■ Operating a VCR or a DVD recorder
(VCR 1, DVR/VCR2 and V-AUX areas)
Controlling each component
TUNER
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
INPUT MODE
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
DTV
POWER
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
VOL
LEVEL
MENU
STRAIGHT
STEREO
ENTERTAIN
NIGHT
MOVIE
THX
/DTS
TEST
ON SCREEN
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
HALL
CHCH
JAZZ
ROCK
TITLE
MUTE
POWER
AMP
AVTV
DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
CD MULTI CH IN
+
+
+
–
–
–
3421
5
90
+10 ENTER
67 8
MUSIC TV THTR
EX/ES
PHONO
TV POWER
Pause
DISC SKIP
(DVD changer)
Skip backward
Search backward
Stop
TITLE
RETURN
Numeric buttons
AV POWER
AUDIO
Skip forward
Play
Search forward
MENU
Menu cursor/
SELECT
DISPLAY
Title/index
TV operation
TUNER
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
INPUT MODE
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
DTV
POWER
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
VOL
LEVEL
MENU
STRAIGHT
STEREO
ENTERTAIN
NIGHT
MOVIE
THX
/DTS
TEST
ON SCREEN
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
HALL
CHCH
JAZZ
ROCK
TITLE
MUTE
POWER
AMP
AVTV
DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
CD MULTI CH IN
+
+
+
–
–
–
3421
5
90
+10 ENTER
67 8
MUSIC TV THTR
EX/ES
PHONO
AV POWER
TV POWER
Pause
Record
Play
Search backward
CH +/–
(channel)
Numeric buttons
Stop
Search forward
TV operation
ENTER
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 64 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
65
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Operating a digital TV (DTV area) or a
cable/satellite TV (CBL/SAT area)
* AV POWER (DTV only), REC, e, p, s, and w/
f will operate your VCR without switching the
input to VCR 1 if the manufacturer code for your VCR
is set up in the VCR 1.
■ Operating an LD player
Set the manufacture code for your LD player following
the setting procedure described on page 60 because DTV
is factory-set to operate TVs.
TUNER
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
INPUT MODE
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
DTV
POWER
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
VOL
LEVEL
MENU
STRAIGHT
STEREO
ENTERTAIN
NIGHT
MOVIE
THX
/DTS
TEST
ON SCREEN
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
HALL
CHCH
JAZZ
ROCK
TITLE
MUTE
POWER
AMP
AVTV
DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
CD MULTI CH IN
+
+
+
–
–
–
3421
5
90
+
10
ENTER
67 8
MUSIC TV THTR
EX/ES
PHONO
TV POWER
ENTER/12
TV VOL –/+
TV MUTE
*
Numeric buttons
TV INPUT
TV operation
CH +/–
TUNER
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
INPUT MODE
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
DTV
POWER
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
VOL
LEVEL
MENU
STRAIGHT
STEREO
ENTERTAIN
NIGHT
MOVIE
THX
/DTS
TEST
ON SCREEN
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
HALL
CHCH
JAZZ
ROCK
TITLE
MUTE
POWER
AMP
AVTV
DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
CD MULTI CH IN
+
+
+
–
–
–
3421
5
90
+10 ENTER
67 8
MUSIC TV THTR
EX/ES
PHONO
DISPLAY
Skip backward
AV POWER
Chapter/time
TV POWER
Sound
Play
Numeric buttons
Skip forward
Stop
Pause
TV operation
Search forward
Search
backward
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 65 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
66
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
■ Operating a CD player (CD area) ■ Operating a CD recorder (CD-R area) or
an MD recorder (MD/TAPE area)
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
INPUT MODE
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
DTV
POWER
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
VOL
LEVEL
MENU
STRAIGHT
STEREO
ENTERTAIN
NIGHT
MOVIE
THX
/DTS
TEST
ON SCREEN
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
HALL
CHCH
JAZZ
ROCK
TITLE
MUTE
POWER
AMP
AVTV
DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER
MULTI CH IN
CD
+
+
+
–
–
–
3421
5
90
+10 ENTER
67 8
MUSIC TV THTR
EX/ES
DISPLAY
Skip backward
AV POWER
Index
TV POWER
Skip forward
DISC SKIP
(CD changer)
Play
Numeric buttons
TV operation
Pause
Search forward
Search
backward
Stop
TUNER
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
INPUT MODE
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
DTV
POWER
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
VOL
LEVEL
MENU
STRAIGHT
STEREO
ENTERTAIN
NIGHT
MOVIE
THX
/DTS
TEST
ON SCREEN
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
HALL
CHCH
JAZZ
ROCK
TITLE
MUTE
POWER
AMP
AVTV
DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
CD MULTI CH IN
+
+
+
–
–
–
3421
5
90
+10 ENTER
67 8
MUSIC TV THTR
EX/ES
PHONO
TV POWER
Record
(MD only)
Skip backward
Search
backward
TV operation
Clear
(CD-R only)
Numeric buttons
AV POWER
Pause
Skip forward
Play
Search forward
Stop
DISPLAY
Index
(CD-R only)
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 66 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
67
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Operating a tape deck (MD/TAPE area)
Set the manufacture code for your tape deck following the
setting procedure described on page 60 because MD/
TAPE is factory-set to operate MD decks.
■ Operating a tuner (TUNER area)
TUNER
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
INPUT MODE
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
DTV
POWER
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
VOL
LEVEL
MENU
STRAIGHT
STEREO
ENTERTAIN
NIGHT
MOVIE
THX
/DTS
TEST
ON SCREEN
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
HALL
CHCH
JAZZ
ROCK
TITLE
MUTE
POWER
AMP
AVTV
DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
CD MULTI CH IN
+
+
+
–
–
–
3421
5
90
+10 ENTER
67 8
MUSIC TV THTR
EX/ES
PHONO
Search backward
Record
Stop
Index
AV POWER
Direction B
Play
Numeric buttons
TV POWER
Pause
Direction A
TV operation
Search forward
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
INPUT MODE
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
DTV
POWER
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
VOL
LEVEL
MENU
STRAIGHT
STEREO
ENTERTAIN
NIGHT
MOVIE
THX
/DTS
TEST
ON SCREEN
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
HALL
CHCH
JAZZ
ROCK
TITLE
MUTE
POWER
AMP
AVTV
DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER
MULTI CH IN
CD
+
+
+
–
–
–
3421
5
90
+10 ENTER
67 8
MUSIC TV THTR
EX/ES
Preset group
A/B/C/D/E
Preset number
1-8
PRESET +
AV POWER
TV POWER
PRESET –
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 67 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., CANADA AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY)
68
This unit allows you to configure a multi-room audio system. The Zone 2 and Zone 3 features enable you to set this unit
to reproduce separate input sources in the main room, second room (Zone 2) and third room (Zone 3). You can control
this unit from the second room using the supplied remote control.
You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-room functions of this unit:
• An infrared signal receiver in the second and/or third room.
• An infrared emitter in the main room. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in the second
and/or third room to the main room (to a CD player or LD player, for example).
• An amplifier and speakers for the second and/or third room.
y
• Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit
in a multi-room installation, we recommend that you consult
with the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center
for the Zone 2/Zone 3 connections which will best meet your
requirements.
• Some YAMAHA models are able to connect directly to the
REMOTE CONTROL OUT jack of this unit. If you own these
products, you may not need to use an infrared emitter. Up to 6
YAMAHA components can be connected as shown.
■ System configuration and connections example
Using external amplifiers
To use an external amplifier in Zone 2, select OFF in ZONE2 AMP.
• When not using the main room, turn down the volume of this unit in the main room. Adjust the ZONE 2/ZONE 3 volume by using the
amplifier in the second/third room. When using the remote control to adjust the ZONE 2 volume, set the volume of the amplifier in the
second room to the maximum level you will use, and select VAR. in ZONE 2 SET OUTPUT VOL (page 58).
• To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2/Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.
ZONE 2/ZONE 3
(U.S.A., CANADA AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY)
Only analog signals are sent to the second and third rooms. Any source you want to listen to in the second or third
room must be connected using the analog (AUDIO L/R) input jacks on this unit.
Zone 2/Zone 3 connections
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
REMOTE
CONTROL OUT
This unit
Notes
REMOTE CONTROL OUT
DVD INPUT
ZONE 2 REMOTE IN
ZONE 2 AUDIO OUT
ZONE 3 AUDIO OUT
This unit
Infrared emitter
DVD player
(or other component)
Amplifier
Remote control
Infrared signal
receiver
Amplifier
Second room Third roomMain room
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 68 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
69
ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., CANADA AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY)
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Using this unit’s internal amplifier
To use this unit’s internal amplifier, select ON in ZONE2 AMP.
The supplied remote control can be used to control Zone
2/Zone 3. You can even select the input source and control
components located in the main room directly from the
second room regardless of the listening condition in the
main room.
■ To enable Zone mode on the remote
control
You will be able to switch the remote control mode from
one room to another, and use STANDBY, SYSTEM
POWER, MUTE and VOL –/+ to control the selected
room.
1 Repeat steps 1 and 2 of the procedure in
“Setting manufacturer codes” on page 60.
2 Press j / i to select “L:AMP”.
3 Press u / d to select “ZONE”.
4 Press LEARN to complete the Zone setup.
The remote control will be able to operate this unit,
Zone 2 or Zone 3.
■ To control Zone 2/Zone 3
1 Press SELECT k repeatedly to display
“ZONE2” or “ZONE3” in the display window.
2 Press SYSTEM POWER to turn Zone 2 or
Zone 3 power on.
3 Press an input selector button to select the
input source you want to listen to in the
second/third room.
The display window shows “2: name of selected
input” if the remote control is in the Zone 2 mode.
Signals input to V-AUX and PHONO jacks cannot be sent to
Zone 2/Zone 3.
R
L
+
–
PRESENCE/ ZONE 2
Second room
This unit
Remote controlling Zone 2/Zone 3
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
LEARN
Note
SELECT SELECT
or
TUNERPHONO
V
-
AUX
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
CD
MULTI CH IN
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 69 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
70
ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., CANADA AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY)
4 You can control Zone 2 or Zone 3 by using
the input selector, STANDBY, SYSTEM
POWER, MUTE and VOL –/+ buttons.
* VOL –/+ can be used only when VAR. is selected in
ZONE2 SET OUTPUT VOL (page 58).
5 Press SELECT k/n to exit from the Zone 2/
Zone 3 mode.
“ZONE2” or “ZONE3” will appear in the display window only
when k is pressed, and SYSTM only when n is pressed.
■ Turning this unit to either on or standby
SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY work differently
depending on the selected mode that appears on the
display window.
• When normal, Zone2 or Zone 3 mode is selected, you
can turn the main unit, Zone 2 or Zone 3 to on/standby
individually.
• When system mode is selected, or when YPC is
selected as the amplifier library (L:AMP) code, you
can turn the main unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 to on/
standby all together simultaneously.
*
“MAIN” appears for a few seconds when SYSTEM POWER
or STANDBY is pressed.
■ Special considerations for DTS software
The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. If you attempt to
send the DTS signal to the second/third room you will
only hear digital noise (that may damage your speakers).
Thus, the following considerations and adjustments need
to be made when playing DTS encoded discs.
For LDs or DVDs encoded with DTS
Only 2 channel analog audio signals may be sent to the
second/third room.
• for LDs: Set your LD player’s left and right outputs to
the analog soundtrack.
• for DVDs: Use the disc menu to set the DVD player’s
mixed 2-channel left and right audio outputs to the
PCM or Dolby Digital soundtrack.
For CDs encoded in DTS
To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2/
Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.
Note
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
INPUT MODE
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER
MULTI CH IN
CD
*
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
AUDI O
VOL
LEVEL
MENU
STRAIGHT
TEST
ON SCREEN
EFFECT
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
TITLE
MUTE
+
+
+
–
–
–
LCD display SYSTEM POWER/
STANDBY
Normal mode* name of component turns the main unit
on/standby
Zone 2 mode “ZONE2” or “2:name
of component”
turns Zone 2 to on/
standby
Zone 3 mode “ZONE3” or “3:name
of component”
turns Zone 3 to on/
standby
System mode “SYSTM” turns everything (the
main unit, Zone 2,
Zone 3) on/standby
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 70 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS
71
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument
are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In
addition to making the sound “live”, these reflections
enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size
and shape of the room in which we are sitting.
■ Elements of a sound field
In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming
straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are
two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to
make up the sound field:
Early reflections
Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms
– 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one
surface only — for example, from the ceiling or a wall.
Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound.
Reverberations
These are caused by reflections from more than one
surface — walls, ceiling, the back of the room — so
numerous that they merge together to form a continuous
sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen
the clarity of the direct sound.
Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent
reverberation taken together help us to determine the
subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this
information that the digital sound field processor
reproduces in order to create sound fields.
If you could create the appropriate early reflections and
subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you
would be able to create your own listening environment.
The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a
concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at
all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly
what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field
processor.
You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset
parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial
settings, you can change some of the parameters to better
suit the input source or your listening room.
1 Press AMP to select the AMP
mode.
2 Turn on the video monitor
and press ON SCREEN
repeatedly to select the full
display mode.
3 Select the sound field program you want to
adjust.
EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS
What is a sound field Changing parameter settings
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
INPUT MODE
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
DTV
POWER
REC
POWER
AMP
AVTV
DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER
MULTI CH IN
CD
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
AUDI O
VOL
LEVEL
MENU
STRAIGHT
STEREO
ENTERTAIN
NIGHT
MOVIE
THX
/DTS
TEST
ON SCREEN
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
HALL
CHCH
JAZZ
ROCK
TITLE
MUTE
AVTV
+
+
+
–
–
–
3421
5
90
+10 ENTER
67 8
MUSIC TV THTR
EX/ES
2
4
5
3
1
AMP
ON SCREEN
DISPLAY
ON SCREEN
DISPLAY
STEREO
ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR
NIGHT
EX/ES
MOVIE
THX
/DTS
CHP/INDEX
HALL
JAZZ
ROCK
3421
5
90
+10 ENTER
67 8
P05 ROCK CONCERT
ROOM SIZE;;;;1.0
LIVENESS;;;;;;;5
REV.TIME;;;;1.6s
REV.DELAY;;120ms
DSP LEVEL;;;;0dB
INIT.DLY;;;;15ms
>
Program No. Program name
Parameters Parameter values
Cursor
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 71 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
72
EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS
4 Press u / d to select
the parameters.
5 Press j / i to change the
parameter value.
When you set a parameter to a
value other than the factory
preset value, an asterisk mark
(*)
appears by the parameter name
on the video monitor.
6 Repeat steps 3 to 5 above as necessary to
change other program parameters.
• The available parameters may be displayed on more than one
OSD page for some of the programs. To scroll through pages,
press u / d.
• You cannot change parameter values when MEMORY
GUARD is set to “ON”. If you want to change the parameter
values, set MEMORY GUARD to “OFF” (see page 56).
■ Resetting parameters to the factory
preset values
To reset a certain parameter
Select the parameter you want to reset, then press –/+
repeatedly until the asterisk mark (*) next to the parameter
name disappears from the video monitor.
To reset all parameters
Use PARAM.INI (see page 57).
Notes
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby
mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC
outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to
power failure. However, if the power is cut for more
than one week, the parameter values will return to the
factory settings. If this happens, edit the parameter
value again.
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 72 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
73
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your
listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.
■ DSP LEVEL
Function: This parameter adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range.
Description: Depending on the acoustics of you listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect
level relative to the level of the direct sound.
Control range: –6 dB – +3 dB
■ INIT. DLY/P. INT. DLY (Initial delay)
Function: This parameter changes the apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the
direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener.
Description: The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The larger the value, the farther
it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set to a large value.
Control range: 1
– 99 msec
■ ROOM SIZE/P. ROOM SIZE (Room size)
Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the
surround sound field becomes.
Description: As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between
the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the
reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from
one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room.
Control range: 0.1 – 2.0
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
Source Sound
Early
Reflections
Time
Time
Time
INIT. DLY
INIT. DLY
INIT. DLY
Sound Source
Reflection Face
Level
Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms
Level
Level
Level
Level
Level
Time
Time
Time
Source Sound
Early
Reflections
Small value = 0.1
Large value = 2.0
Sound Source
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 73 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
74
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
■ LIVENESS
Function: This parameter adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the
early reflections decay.
Description: The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall
surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces
is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. The
LIVENESS parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the
room.
Control range: 0 – 10
■ S. INIT. DLY (Surround initial delay)
Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side of
the sound field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two surround
channels are used.
Control Range: 1 – 49 msec
■ S. ROOM SIZE (Surround room size)
Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field.
Control Range: 0.1 – 2.0
■ S. LIVENESS (Surround liveness)
Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field.
Control Range: 0 – 10
■ SB INIT. DLY (Surround back initial delay)
Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the surround back
sound field.
Control Range: 1 – 49 msec
■ SB ROOM SIZE (Surround back room size)
Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround back sound field.
Control Range: 0.1 – 2.0
■ SB LIVENESS (Surround back liveness)
Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual wall in the surround back sound field.
Control Range: 0 – 10
Source Sound
Level
Level
Level
Dead
Live
Time
Time Time
Small Reflected
Sound
Large Reflected
Sound
Small value = 0
Large value = 10
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 74 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
75
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
■ REV.TIME (Reverberation time)
Function: This parameter adjusts the amount of time it takes for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to
decay by 60 dB (at 1 kHz). This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an
extremely wide range.
Description: Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening room environments, and a shorter time
for “live” sources and listening room environments.
Control Range: 1.0 – 5.0 sec
■ REV.DELAY (Reverberation delay)
Function: This parameter adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning
of the reverberation sound.
Description: The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you
feel like you are in a larger acoustic environment.
Control Range: 0 – 250 msec
■ REV. LEVEL (Reverberation level)
Function: This parameter adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound.
Description: The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes.
Control Range: 0 – 100%
Reverberation
Reverberation
60 dB 60 dB 60 dB
Source Sound
REV.TIME
REV.TIME
REV.TIME
Sound Source Short
Reverberation
Long
Reverberation
Small value = 1.0 s
Large value = 5.0 s
Early Reflections
(dB)
60 dB
Level
Source Sound
Reverberation
REV.TIME
REV.DELAY
Time
Source Sound
Level
REV. LEVEL
Time
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 75 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
76
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
■ DIALG.LIFT (Dialog lift)
Function: This parameter adjusts the height of the front and center channel sounds by assigning some of the front
and center channel elements to the presence speakers.
Description: The larger the parameter, the higher the position of the front and center channel sound.
Choices: 0/1/2/3/4/5, initial setting is 3.
For 7ch Stereo
Function: These parameter adjusts the volume level for each channel in 7-channel stereo mode.
Control Range: 0 – 100%
■ CT LEVEL (Center level)
■ SL LEVEL (Surround left level)
■ SR LEVEL (Surround right level)
■ SB LEVEL (Surround back level)
■ PR LEVEL (Presence level)
For PRO LOGIC IIx Music and PRO LOGIC II Music
■ PANORAMA
Function: Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for wraparound effect.
Choices: OFF/ON, initial setting is OFF.
■ DIMENSION
Function: Gradually adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear.
Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard).
■ CT WIDTH (Center width)
Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. A larger value adjusts the
center image towards the front left and right speakers.
Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only
from front left and right speakers), initial setting is 3.
For PRO LOGIC IIx Music, Movie and Game
■ PLII/PLIIx (Pro Logic II/Pro Logic IIx)
Function: Switches the type of Pro Logic decoding to be used. PLII decoding creates 5.1-channel sound from 2-
channel sources. PLIIx decoding creates 6.1/7.1-channel sound from 2-channel sources.
Choices: PLII, PLIIx
For DTS Neo:6 Music
■ C. IMAGE (Center image)
Function: This parameter adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees.
Control range: 0 – 0.5
For THX Cinema
■ DEC (2ch Decoder Select)
Function: Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using THX Cinema.
Choices: PRO LOGIC / PLII Movie / Neo:6 Cinema
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 76 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
TROUBLESHOOTING
77
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed
below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, and contact
the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.
■ General
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
This unit fails to turn
on when STANDBY/
ON (or SYSTEM
POWER) is pressed,
or enters in the
standby mode soon
after the power has
been turned on.
The power cord is not connected or the
plug is not completely inserted.
Connect the power cord firmly.
—
The impedance setting is incorrect. Set the impedance to match your speakers.
23
The protection circuitry has been
activated.
Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit
and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for
each connection does not touch anything other than
its respective connection.
12—14
This unit has been exposed to a strong
external electric shock (such as lightning
and strong static electricity).
Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the
power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, then use
it normally.
—
On screen display
does not appear.
The setting for the on-screen display is set
to “DISPLAY OFF”.
Select the full display or short display mode.
44
GRAY BACK in the SET MENU is set to
OFF, and no video signal is currently
being received.
Set GRAY BACK to AUTO to always show the OSD.
56
No sound Incorrect input or output cable
connections.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
16—19
INPUT MODE is set to DTS or
ANALOG.
Select AUTO.
34
No appropriate input source has been
selected.
Select an appropriate input source with INPUT,
MULTI CH INPUT or the input selector buttons.
30
Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections.
12
The front speakers to be used have not
been selected properly.
Select the front speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or
B.
30
The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume.
—
The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to
cancel a mute and adjust the volume.
31
If you are playing an LD source, the
player may not output digital signals if the
LD source was not digitally recorded.
Set the INPUT MODE to ANALOG.
34
The INPUT MODE is set to ANALOG
while playing a source encoded with a
DTS signal.
Set the INPUT MODE to AUTO or DTS.
34
The signals this unit cannot reproduce are
being received from a source component
e.g.: a CD-ROM.
Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce.
—
No picture The output and input for the picture are
connected to different types of video
jacks.
Turn on the video conversion function.
56
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 77 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
78
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
The sound suddenly
goes off.
The protection circuitry has been activated
because of a short circuit, etc.
Check that the impedance selector setting is correct.
23
Check that the speaker wires are not touching each
other and then turn this unit back on.
—
The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power, and play the source again.
—
The sound is muted. Press MUTE to cancel a mute.
31
Only the speaker on
one side can be
heard.
Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
12
Incorrect balance settings in SET MENU. Adjust the SP LEVEL settings.
50
Only the center
speaker outputs
substantial sound.
When playing a monaural source with a
CINEMA DSP program, the source signal
is directed to the center channel, and the
front and surround speakers output effect
sounds.
No sound from the
effect speakers.
The sound field programs are turned off. Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to turn them on.
34
A Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS
decoding DSP program is being used with
material not encoded with Dolby
Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS.
Try another sound field program.
32
No sound from the
center speaker.
The output level of the center speaker is
set to minimum.
Raise the level of the center speaker.
50
“CENTER SP” in the SET MENU is set
to NONE.
Select the appropriate mode for your center speaker.
49
One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (except
for 7ch Stereo) has been selected.
Try another sound field program.
32
No sound from the
surround speakers.
The output level of the surround speakers
is set to minimum.
Raise the output level of the surround speakers.
50
“SURR. LR SP” in the SET MENU is set
to NONE.
Select the appropriate speaker mode for the surround
L/R speakers.
49
A monaural source is being played with
STRAIGHT.
Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to turn on the sound
fields. Then try another sound field program.
—
No sound from the
surround back
speakers.
Presence speakers are selected. Select surround back speakers in PR/SBch SELECT.
53
“SURR. LR SP” in the SET MENU is set
to NONE.
If the speaker mode for the surround L/R speakers is
set to NONE, the speaker mode for the surround back
speaker is automatically set to NONE. Select the
appropriate speaker mode for the surround L/R
speaker mode.
49
“SURR B L/R SP” in the SET MENU is
set to NONE.
Select LRG or SML.
49
No sound from the
subwoofer.
“LFE/BASS OUT” in the SET MENU is
set to FRONT when a Dolby Digital or
DTS signal is being played.
Select SWFR or BOTH.
50
“LFE/BASS OUT” in the SET MENU is
set to SWFR or FRONT when a 2-channel
source is being played.
Select BOTH.
50
The source does not contain low bass
signals.
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 78 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
79
TROUBLESHOOTING
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
Dolby Digital or DTS
sources cannot be
played. (Dolby Digital
or DTS indicator on
the front panel
display does not light
up.)
The connected component is not set to
output Dolby Digital or DTS digital
signals.
Make an appropriate setting following the operations
instructions for your component.
—
INPUT MODE is set to ANALOG. Set INPUT MODE to AUTO or DTS.
34
A “humming” sound
can be heard.
Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
—
No connection from the turntable to the
GND terminal.
Connect the grounding cord of your turnable to the
GND terminal of this unit.
19
The volume level is
low while playing a
record.
The record is being played on a turntable
with an MC cartridge.
The turntable should be connected to this unit through
an MC-head amplifier.
19
The volume level
cannot be increased,
or the sound is
distorted.
The component connected to the OUT
(REC) jacks of this unit is turned off.
Turn on the power to the component.
—
The sound effect
cannot be recorded.
It is not possible to record the sound effect
with a recording component.
A source cannot be
recorded by a digital
recording component
connected to this
DIGITAL OUTPUT
jack.
The source component is not connected to
this unit’s DIGITAL INPUT jacks.
Connect the source component to the DIGITAL
INPUT jacks.
16—19
Some components cannot record the
Dolby Digital or DTS sources.
A source cannot be
recorded by an
analog component
connected to the
AUDIO OUT jacks.
The source component is not connected to
this unit’s analog AUDIO IN jacks.
Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO
IN jacks.
16—19
The sound field
parameters and some
other settings on this
unit cannot be
changed.
“MEMORY GUARD” in the SET MENU
is set to ON.
Select OFF.
56
This unit does not
operate properly.
The internal microcomputer has been
frozen by an external electric shock (such
as lightning or excessive static electricity)
or by a power supply with low voltage.
Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and
then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.
—
“CHECK SP WIRES”
appears on the front
panel display.
Speaker cables are short circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.
12
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 79 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
80
TROUBLESHOOTING
■ Tuner
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
There is noise
interference from
digital or high-
frequency equipment,
or this unit.
This unit is too close to the digital or high-
frequency equipment.
Move this unit further away from such equipment.
—
The picture is
disturbed.
The video source uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent dubbing.
Playing back video software that has an anti-copy
signal or video signals with a lot of noise may
produce unstable images.
—
There is noise when
the OSD is displayed.
The OSD may be disturbed when
displaying OSD through component video
connections.
Select OFF in CMPNT OSD.
56
This unit suddenly
turns into the standby
mode.
The internal temperature becomes too
high and the overheat protection circuitry
has been activated.
Wait until this unit cools down and then turn it back
on.
—
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
FM
FM stereo reception is
noisy.
The characteristics of FM stereo
broadcasts may cause this problem
when the transmitter is too far away
or the antenna input is poor.
Check the antenna connections. Try using a
high-quality directional FM antenna.
21
Use the manual tuning method.
36
There is distortion, and
clear reception cannot
be obtained even with a
good FM antenna.
There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate
multipath interference.
—
The desired station
cannot be tuned in with
the automatic tuning
method.
The station is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.
21
Use the manual tuning method.
36
Previously preset
stations can no longer
be tuned in.
This unit has been disconnected for a
long period.
Preset the stations again.
37
AM
The desired station
cannot be tuned in with
the automatic tuning
method.
The signal is weak or the antenna
connections are loose.
Tighten the AM loop antenna connections
and orient it for best reception.
—
Use the manual tuning method.
36
There are continuous
crackling and hissing
noises.
Noises result from lightning,
fluorescent lamps, motors,
thermostats and other electrical
equipment.
Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.
This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to
eliminate all noise.
—
There are buzzing and
whining noises
(especially in the
evening).
A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV.
—
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 80 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
81
TROUBLESHOOTING
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
■ Remote control
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
The remote control
does not work nor
function properly.
Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum
range of 6 m (20 feet) and no more than 30 degrees
off-axis from the front panel.
7
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an
inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is
striking the remote control sensor of this
unit.
Reposition this unit.
—
The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries.
3
The manufacture code has not correctly
set.
Set the manufacturer code correctly.
60
Try to set the other codes of the same manufacturer.
60
Even if the manufacturer code is correctly
set, there are some models that do not
respond to the remote control.
Program the necessary functions independently into
the programmable buttons using the Learn feature.
61
The remote control
does not “learn” new
functions.
The batteries of this remote control and/or
the other remote control are too weak.
Replace the batteries.
3
The distance between the two remote
controls is too much or too little.
Place the remote controls at the proper distance.
61
The signal coding or modulation of the
other remote control is not compatible
with this remote control.
Learning is not possible.
—
Memory capacity is full. Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for
the new functions.
63
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 81 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
GLOSSARY
82
■ Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system
to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front
left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog
(monaural), and a surround channel for special sound
effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces
sound within a narrow frequency range.
Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes
and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as
well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit
employs a digital signal processing system that
automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to
enhance moving sound effects and directionality.
■ Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives
you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3
front channels (left, center, and right), and 2 surround
stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio
channels. With an additional channel especially for bass
effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system has
a total of 5.1 channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By
using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more
accurate moving sound effects and surround sound
environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The
wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum
volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the
precise sound orientation generated using digital sound
processing provide listeners with previously unheard of
excitement and realism.
With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up
to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for
your enjoyment.
Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output
channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a
matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the
2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby
Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks
recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this
additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and
realistic moving sound especially with scenes with
"flyover" and "fly-around" effects.
■ Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to
decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround
software. This new technology enables a discrete 5-
channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1
center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels
(instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro
Logic technology). The Music and Game modes are also
available for 2-channel sources in addition to the movie
mode.
■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete
7.1-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel
sources. There is a Music mode for music, a Movie mode
for movies and a Game mode for games.
■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
Digital Surround
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog
soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound
track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie
theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.
has developed a home theater system so that you can
enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation
of DTS digital surround in your home. This system
produces practically distortion-free 6-channel sound
(technically, a left, right and center channels, 2 surround
channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a
total of 5.1 channels).
The unit incorporates DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-
channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel
to existing 5.1-channel format.
■ Neo:6
Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6
channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables
playback with the full-range channels with higher
separation just like digital discrete signal playback. Two
modes are available; “Music mode” for playing music
sources and “Cinema mode” for movies.
■ LFE 0.1 channel
This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals.
The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz.
This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a
low frequency range compared to the full-range
reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in a Dolby Digital or
DTS 5.1/6.1 channel systems.
GLOSSARY
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 82 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
83
GLOSSARY
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
■ THX Cinema processing
THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies
established by the world-renowned film production
company, Lucasfilm Ltd. THX grew from George Lucas’
personal desire to make your experience of the film
soundtrack, in both movie theatres and in your home
theatre, as faithful as possible to what the director
intended.
Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theatres
called dubbing stages and are designed to be played back
in movie theatres with similar equipment and conditions.
This same soundtrack is then transferred directly onto
Laserdisc, VHS tape, DVD, etc., and is not changed for
playback in a small home theatre environment.
THX engineers developed patented technologies to
accurately translate the sound from the movie theatre
environment into the home, correcting the tonal and
spatial errors that occur. On this product, when the THX
indicator is on, THX features are automatically added in
Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX Surround EX).
■ Re-Equalization
The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively
bright and harsh when played back over audio equipment
in the home because film soundtracks were designed to be
played back in large movie theatres using very different
professional equipment. Re-Equalization restores the
correct tonal balance for watching a movie soundtrack in a
small home environment.
■ Timbre Matching
The human ear changes our perception of a sound
depending on the direction from which the sound is
coming. In a movie theatre, there is an array of surround
speakers so that the surround information is all around
you. In a home theatre, you use only two speakers located
to the side of your head. The Timbre Matching feature
filters the information going to the surround speakers so
that they more closely match the tonal characteristics of
the sound coming from the front speakers. This ensures
seamless panning between the front and surround
speakers.
■ Adaptive Decorrelation
In a movie theatre, a large number of surround speakers
help create an enveloping surround sound experience, but
in a home theatre there are usually only two speakers. This
can make the surround speakers sound like headphones
that lack spaciousness and envelopment. The surround
sounds will also collapse into the closest speaker as you
move away from the middle seating position. Adaptive
Decorrelation slightly changes one surround channel's
time and phase relationship with respect to the other
surround channel. This expands the listening position and
creates--with only two speakers--the same spacious
surround experience as in a movie theatre.
■ THX Select
Before any home theatre component can be THX Select
certified, it must incorporate all the features above and
also pass a rigorous series of quality and performance
tests. Only then can a product feature the THX Select
logo, which is your guarantee that the Home Theatre
products you purchase will give you superb performance
for many years to come. THX Select requirements cover
every aspect of the product including power amplifier and
pre-amplifier performance and operation, and hundreds of
other parameters in both the digital and analog domain.
■ THX Surround EX
THX Surround EX - Dolby Digital Surround EX is a joint
development of Dolby Laboratories and the THX Ltd.
In a movie theater, film soundtracks that have been
encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology are
able to reproduce an extra channel which has been added
during the mixing of the program. This channel, called
Surround Back, places sounds behind the listener in
addition to the currently available front left, front center,
front right, surround right, surround left and subwoofer
channels. This additional channel provides the opportunity
for more detailed imaging behind the listener and brings
more depth, spacious ambience and sound localization
than ever before.
Movies that were created using the Dolby Digital
Surround EX technology, when released into the home
consumer market may exhibit wording to that effect on the
packaging. A list of movies created using this technology
can be found on the Dolby web site at www.dolby.com. A
list of available DVD software titles encoded with this
technology can be found at www.thx.com.
Only receiver and controller products bearing the THX
Surround EX logo, when in the THX Surround EX mode,
faithfully reproduce this new technology in the home.
This product may also engage the THX Surround EX
mode during the playback of 5.1 channel material that is
not Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded. In such case the
information delivered to the Surround Back channel will
be program dependent and may or may not be very
pleasing depending on the particular soundtrack and the
tastes of the individual listener.
■ CINEMA DSP
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were
originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect
is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed
for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room
size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can
differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in
the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth of actually
measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses
YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine
Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to
provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater
in the listening room of your own home.
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 83 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
84
GLOSSARY
■ SILENT CINEMA
YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect
DSP algorithm for headphones.
Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound
field so that accurate representations of all the sound field
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
■ Virtual CINEMA DSP
YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP
algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field
surround effects even without any surround speakers by
using virtual surround speakers.
It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a
minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center
speaker.
■ PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog
audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without
using any compression. This is used as a method of
recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a
technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per
very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code
modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and
then modulated for recording.
■ Sampling frequency and number of
quantized bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of
times the signal is sampled per second is called the
sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when
converting the sound level into a numeric value is called
the number of quantized bits.
The range of rates that can be played back is determined
based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range
representing the sound level difference is determined by
the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the
sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies
that can be played back, and the higher the number of
quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be
reproduced.
■ ITU-R
ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU
(International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R
recommends a standard speaker placement which is used
in many critical listening rooms, especially for mastering
purposes.
■ Composite Video signal
With the composite video signal system, the video signal
is composed of three basic elements of a video picture;
color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite
video jack on a video component transmits these three
elements combined.
■ S VIDEO signal
With the S VIDEO signal system, the video signal
normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and
transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C
signal for the chrominance through the S VIDEO cable.
Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal
transmission loss and allows recording and playback of
even more beautiful images.
■ Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal
is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the P
B
and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be
reproduced more faithfully with this system because each
of these signals is independent. The component signal is
also called the “color difference signal” because the
luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal.
A monitor with component input jacks is required in order
to use the component signal for output.
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 84 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
SPECIFICATIONS
85
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
AUDIO SECTION
• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,
Surround back
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω ..................................... 110 W
• Maximum Power (EIAJ)
[China, Asia, Korea and General models]
1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ..........................................................165 W
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
[U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia, Asia, Korea and General
models]
8/6/4/2 Ω ........................................................ 145/185/240/320 W
• DIN Standard Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω .........................................................170 W
• IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]
1 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω .......................................................125 W
• Damping Factor (IHF)
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω................................................... 140 or more
• Frequency Response
CD terminal to Front L/R ...................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion
PHONO to REC OUT (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) .................. 0.02%
CD, etc. to Front L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 60 W, 8 Ω) .......... 0.04%
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
PHONO (5 mV) to Front L/R
[U.K., Europe and Australia models] ....................................81 dB
[Other models].......................................................................86 dB
CD (250 mV) to Front L/R, Effect Off................................ 100 dB
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front L/R ............................................................... 150 µV or less
• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)
PHONO (terminated) to Front L/R ........................... 60 dB/55 dB
CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Front L/R ....................... 60 dB/45 dB
• Tone Control (Front L/R)
BASS Boost/Cut ....................................................... ±6 dB/50 Hz
BASS Turnover Frequency..................................................350 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut ................................................ ±6 dB/20 kHz
TREBLE Turnover Frequency............................................3.5 kHz
• Phones Output .......................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω
• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance
PHONO .................................................................. 3.5 mV/47 kΩ
CD, etc .................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ
MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ
• Output Level/Output Impedance
REC OUT ............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 kΩ
PRE OUT ................................................................... 1.0 V/500 Ω
SUBWOOFER ........................................................... 2.0 V/500 Ω
ZONE 2 OUTPUT
[U.S.A., Canada and Australia models].................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ
ZONE 3 OUTPUT
[U.S.A., Canada and Australia models]............. 200 mV/1.2 kΩ
VIDEO SECTION
• Video Signal Type
[U.S.A., Canada and Korea models] ................................... NTSC
[Other models] ............................................................ PAL/NTSC
• Signal to Noise Ratio .............................................................. 50 dB
• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)
Composite, S-Video ................................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB
Component ............................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB
FM SECTION
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz
[Asia and General model] ......... 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz
• Usable Sensitivity (IHF)........................................ 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo ................................................................ 0.2%/0.3%
• Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 42 dB
• Frequency Response ........................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz +0.5, –2 dB
AM SECTION
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz
[Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models] ................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz
• Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m
GENERAL
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. AC 120 V/60 Hz
[Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V/50 Hz
[China model] ..................................................... AC 220 V/50 Hz
[Korea model] .................................................... AC 220 V/60 Hz
[U.K. and Europe models] ................................. AC 230 V/50 Hz
[Asia and General models] AC 110/120/220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz
• Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 500 W/630 VA
[Other models] ................................................................... 500 W
• Standby Power Consumption
................................................................................... 0.5 W or less
•AC Outlets
[U.S.A. and Canada models]..... 2 (Total 100 W/0.8 A maximum)
[U.K. and Australia models] .............. 1 (Total 100 W maximum)
[China and Europe models] ................ 2 (Total 100 W maximum)
[Asia and General models] ................... 2 (Total 50 W maximum)
• Dimension (W x H x D) ................................... 435 x 171 x 421 mm
(17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 16-7/8”)
• Weight ........................................................................ 15 kg (33 lbs)
SPECIFICATIONS
00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 85 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM
©2003 All rights reserved.
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA
6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.
135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.
SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.
RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.
YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.
J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.
17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
HTR-5790
AV Receiver
OWNER'S MANUAL
U
Printed in Malaysia WC85700
HTR-5790U-cv.fm Page 1 Tuesday, November 18, 2003 11:12 AM
Documenttranscriptie
HTR-5790U-cv.fm Page 1 Tuesday, November 18, 2003 11:12 AM U HTR-5790 AV Receiver ©2003 YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. Printed in Malaysia WC85700 OWNER'S MANUAL 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 2 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 10 CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. • Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 i 11 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the product is operated. Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions should be followed. Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning. Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards. Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water – for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool; and the like. Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the product. Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer. A product and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart combination to overturn. 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to. Power Sources – This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power company. For products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions. Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the product. Lightning – For added protection for this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges. Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal. Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product. Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged, b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product, c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water, 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 3 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS d) 20 21 22 23 If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation, e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way, and f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance - this indicates a need for service. Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards. Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition. Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer. Heat – The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING MAST ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE GROUND CLAMP ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810–20) ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810–21) GROUND CLAMPS Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250. PART H) NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE FCC INFORMATION (for US customers) 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. ii 3 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 4 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place — away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet during an electrical storm. 14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 16 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 18 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/220/230-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. We Want You Listening For A Lifetime YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association's Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion - and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. iii 4 Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 1 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM CONTENTS CONTENTS ............................................................ 1 FEATURES............................................................. 2 GETTING STARTED............................................ 3 Supplied accessories .................................................. 3 Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 3 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS...............................................41 For movie/video sources.......................................... 41 For music sources .................................................... 43 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4 PREPARATION SPEAKER SETUP ............................................... 11 ADVANCED OPERATIONS ..............................44 Selecting the OSD mode.......................................... 44 Using the sleep timer ............................................... 44 Manually adjusting speaker levels........................... 45 Using the test tone ................................................... 46 SET MENU ............................................................47 Using SET MENU................................................... 48 Manual setup: SOUND............................................ 49 Manual setup: INPUT.............................................. 54 Manual setup: OPTION........................................... 56 CONNECTIONS .................................................. 15 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................59 Before connecting components................................ 15 Connecting video components................................. 16 Connecting audio components................................. 19 Connecting the antennas .......................................... 21 Connecting the power supply cord .......................... 22 Speaker impedance setting ...................................... 23 Turning on the power............................................... 23 Control area ............................................................. 59 Setting manufacturer codes...................................... 60 Programming codes from other remote controls ..... 61 Changing source names in the display window....... 62 Clearing function sets .............................................. 63 Clearing individual functions .................................. 63 Controlling each component.................................... 64 Introduction.............................................................. 24 Optimizer microphone setup.................................... 24 Starting the setup ..................................................... 25 BASIC SETUP ...................................................... 28 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS AUTO SETUP....................................................... 24 BASIC OPERATION Speaker placement ................................................... 11 Speaker connections ................................................ 12 ADVANCED OPERATION PREPARATION Front panel ................................................................. 4 Remote control........................................................... 6 Using the remote control ........................................... 7 Front panel display .................................................... 8 Rear panel ................................................................ 10 ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only) ..68 Zone 2/Zone 3 connections...................................... 68 Remote controlling Zone 2/Zone 3.......................... 69 Using BASIC setup.................................................. 28 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION BASIC OPERATION Basic operations....................................................... 30 Selecting sound field programs ............................... 32 Selecting input modes.............................................. 34 TUNING ................................................................ 36 Automatic and manual tuning.................................. 36 Presetting stations .................................................... 37 Selecting preset stations........................................... 39 Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 39 What is a sound field ............................................... 71 Changing parameter settings ................................... 71 ADVANCED OPERATION PLAYBACK.......................................................... 30 EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS ......71 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS...............................................73 TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................77 GLOSSARY...........................................................82 SPECIFICATIONS...............................................85 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION RECORDING ....................................................... 40 1 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 2 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM FEATURES FEATURES Built-in 7-channel power amplifier Other features ◆ Minimum RMS output power (0.04% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz, 8Ω) Front: 110 W + 110 W Center: 110 W Surround: 110 W + 110 W Surround Back: 110 W + 110 W ◆ YPAO: YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer for automatic speaker setup ◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter ◆ “SET MENU” which provides you with items for optimizing this unit for your audio/video system ◆ 6 or 8-channel external decoder input for other future formats ◆ On Screen Display function helpful in controlling this unit ◆ S Video signal input/output capability ◆ Component video input/output capability ◆ Video signal conversion (composite video ↔ S Video → component video) capability for monitor out ◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks ◆ Sleep timer ◆ Night listening mode ◆ Remote control with preset manufacturer codes ◆ Zone 2/Zone 3 custom installation facility (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only) Sound field features ◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of sound fields ◆ THX ◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder ◆ DTS/DTS ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6 decoder, DTS 96/24 ◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx Decoder ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA™ Sophisticated AM/FM tuner ◆ 40-station random access preset tuning ◆ Automatic preset tuning ◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing) • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. “DTS” and “DTS-ES Digital Surround” and “Neo:6” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. SILENT CINEMA is a trademark of YAMAHA CORPORATION. THX and the THX logo are registered trademarks of THX Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc. and is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved. Used under authorization. 2 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 3 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM GETTING STARTED GETTING STARTED INTRODUCTION Supplied accessories Please check that you received all of the following parts. Batteries (4) (AAA, R03, UM-4) Remote control TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR Power Cord (U.S.A., Canada and Europe models) AM loop antenna LEARN SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD SELECT POWER POWER TV AV AMP REC AUDIO DISC SKIP + Speaker terminal wrench 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model only) VOL Indoor FM antenna (U.S.A., Canada, China, Korea, Asia and General models) – LEVEL TITLE SET MENU + MUTE MENU TV VOL A/B/C/D/E TV INPUT CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TEST ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN – DISPLAY STEREO HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 EFFECT THX 9 /DTS 0 ROCK Optimizer microphone* 8 NIGHT EX/ES +10 ENTER * CHP/INDEX The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. – Keep it away from direct sunlight. – Do not place it on top of this unit. Installing batteries in the remote control 2 1 3 (U.K., Europe and Australia models) Notes on batteries • Change all of the batteries if you notice the condition like; the operation range of the remote control decreases, the indicator does not flash or its light becomes dim. • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. If the remote control is without batteries for more than 3 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the manufacturer code and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. 1 Press the part and slide the battery compartment cover off. 2 Insert four supplied batteries (AAA, R03, UM4) according to the polarity markings on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place. 3 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 4 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel (U.S.A. model) VOLUME STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING OPTIMIZER MIC FM/AM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING EDIT PROGRAM PHONES MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO INPUT SPEAKERS A VIDEO AUX B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 1 STANDBY/ON Turns on this unit or sets it to the standby mode. When you turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. Note In standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared-signals from the remote control. 2 Remote control sensor Receives signals from the remote control. 3 Front panel display Shows information about the operational status of this unit. 4 PRESET/TUNING EDIT Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h between selecting preset station numbers and tuning. 5 FM/AM Switches the reception band between FM and AM. 6 A/B/C/D/E Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E). 4 S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL 7 PRESET/TUNING l / h Selects preset station number 1 to 8 when the colon (:) is displayed next to the band indication in the front panel display. Selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) is not displayed. 8 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) Stores a station in the memory. Hold down this button for more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning. 9 TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) Switches the tuning mode between automatic (“AUTO” indicator on) and manual (“AUTO” indicator off). 0 VOLUME Controls the output level of all audio channels. This does not affect the REC OUT level. A OPTIMIZER MIC jack Use to connect and input audio signals from the supplied microphone for use with the AUTO SETUP function (see page 24). 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 5 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS INTRODUCTION B PHONES (SILENT CINEMA) Outputs audio signals for private listening with headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals are output to the OUTPUT jacks or to the speakers. All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the left and right headphone channels. C SPEAKERS A/B Turn on or off the set of front speakers connected to the A and/or B terminals on the rear panel at each time the corresponding button is pressed. D STRAIGHT/EFFECT Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are output directly from their respective speakers without effect processing. E PROGRAM Use to select sound field programs or adjust bass/treble balance (in conjunction with TONE CONTROL). F TONE CONTROL Use to adjust the bass/treble balance for the front left/right and center channels (see page 31). G INPUT MODE Sets the priority (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) for the type of signals received when one component is connected to two or more of this unit’s input jacks (see page 34). Priority cannot be set when MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source. H INPUT selector Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch. I MULTI CH INPUT Selects the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. When selected, the MULTI CH INPUT source takes priority over the source selected with INPUT (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). J VIDEO AUX jacks Input audio and video signals from a portable external source such as a game console. To reproduce source signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input source. 5 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 6 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Remote control This section describes the function of each control on the remote control. See “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on page 59 to operate other components with this remote control. TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR LEARN 4 SYSTEM POWER Turns on the power of this unit. 5 Input selector buttons Select the input source and change the control area. 6 Display window Shows the name of the selected source component that you can control. SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD SELECT POWER POWER TV AV AMP REC AUDIO DISC SKIP + VOL – LEVEL TITLE SET MENU + MUTE MENU TV VOL TV INPUT CH – A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TEST ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN – DISPLAY STEREO HALL JAZZ ROCK 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 NIGHT EX/ES +10 ENTER EFFECT THX 9 /DTS 0 CHP/INDEX 1 Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. 2 TRANSMIT indicator Flashes while the remote control is sending signals. 3 STANDBY Sets this unit in the standby mode. 6 7 LEVEL Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted and sets the level. 8 Cursor buttons u / d / j / i Use to select and adjust DSP program parameters or SET MENU items. 9 TEST Outputs the test tone to adjust the speaker levels. 0 Sound field program/Numeric buttons Use to select sound field programs or input numbers. A RE-NAME Used for changing the input source name in the display window (see page 62). B CLEAR Used for clearing functions acquired when using the learn and rename features, or setting manufacturer codes (see page 63). C LEARN Used for setting up the manufacturer code or for programming functions from other remote controls (see pages 60 and 61). D SLEEP Sets the sleep timer. E INPUT MODE Sets the priority (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) for the type of signals received when one component is connected to two or more of this unit’s input jacks (see page 34). Priority cannot be set when MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source. F MULTI CH IN Selects the MULTI CH INPUT mode when using an external decoder (etc.). G SELECT k/n Selects another component that you can control independently of the input component selected with the input selector buttons. H AMP Selects AMP or other component selected by the input selector button. 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 7 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS I VOL –/+ Increases or decreases the volume level. VOLUME STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING OPTIMIZER MIC FM/AM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING EDIT PROGRAM K SET MENU Selects the SET MENU mode. L ON SCREEN Selects the on-screen display (OSD) mode for your video monitor. INTRODUCTION J MUTE Mutes the sound. The MUTE indicator turns on when the MUTE function is on. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level. Using the remote control PHONES MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO INPUT SPEAKERS A VIDEO AUX B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT S VIDEO SILENT CINEMA 30 30 L AUDIO R OPTICAL Approximately 6 m (20 ft) RE–NAME CLEAR LEARN TRANSMIT SYSTEM POWER VIDEO STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE CD MULTI CH IN PHONO TUNER V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 CD-R DVD SELECT POWER POWER TV AV AMP REC AUDIO M STRAIGHT/EFFECT Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are output directly from their respective speakers without effect processing. N EX/ES Switches between 5.1 or 6.1/7.1 channel playback of multi-channel software. DISC SKIP VOL LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MUTE MENU TV VOL TV INPUT CH A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH PRESET TEST ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN DISPLAY EFFECT STEREO HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR 5 THX 9 6 /DTS 0 7 NIGHT +10 ROCK 4 MOVIE 8 EX/ES ENTER CHP/INDEX The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on the main unit during operation. ■ Handling the remote control • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – high humidity such as near a bath – high temperature such as near a heater or stove – extremely low temperature – dusty places 7 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 8 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel display V–AUX DVR/VCR2 MATRIX DISCRETE EX NIGHT DIGITAL SILENT PL PL SP THX PCM AB 96 24 VCR 1 VIRTUAL CBL/SAT DTV DVD ZONE2 ZONE3 SLEEP 1 Decoder indicators When any of this unit’s decoders function, the respective indicator lights up. 2 Sound field indicators Light to indicate the active DSP sound fields. Presence DSP sound field Listening position Left surround DSP sound field Right surround DSP sound field Surround back DSP sound field 3 Input source indicators A cursor lights to show the current input source. 4 CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program. 5 OPTIMIZER indicator Lights up during the auto setup procedure and when the auto setup speaker settings are used without any modifications. 6 STEREO indicator Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an FM stereo broadcast while the “AUTO” indicator is lit. 7 AUTO indicator Shows that this unit is in the automatic tuning mode. 8 MUTE indicator Lights up while the MUTE function is on. 8 CD–R CD TUNER PHONO PS PTY RT CT STEREO AUTO MUTE VOLUME EON PTY HOLD TUNED MEMORY ft mS dB (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only) 9 VOLUME level indicators Indicate the volume level. MD/TAPE OPTIMIZER HiFi DSP 96/24 L C R LFE SL SB SR (U.K. and Europe models only) 0 THX indicator Lights up when a THX program is selected. A PCM indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code modulation) digital audio signals. B Headphones indicator Lights up when headphones are connected. C SP A B indicators Light up according to the set of front speakers selected. Both indicators light up when both sets of speakers are selected, or when bi-wiring. D SILENT CINEMA indicator Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound field program is selected (see page 31). E NIGHT indicator Lights up when you select night listening mode. F VIRTUAL indicator Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see page 34). G SLEEP indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on. H Multi-information display Shows the current sound field program name and other information when adjusting or changing settings. I HiFi DSP Lights when you select a HiFi DSP sound field program. 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 9 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS J TUNED indicator Lights up when this unit is tuned in to a station. INTRODUCTION K MEMORY indicator Flashes to show a station can be stored. L 96/24 indicator Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit. M LFE indicator Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE signal. N Input channel indicators Indicate the channel components of current digital input signal. O Presence and surround back speaker indicators Indicate the connection of presence and/or surround back speakers when using the SPEAKERS setting (page 29) or SP LEVEL setting (page 50). P ZONE 2/ZONE 3 indicators (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only) Light up while Zone 2 or Zone 3 signal is output. Q RDS indicators (U.K. and Europe models only) The name(s) of the RDS data offered by the currently received RDS station light(s) up. EON lights up when an RDS station that offers the EON data service is being received. PTY HOLD lights up while searching for stations in the PTY SEEK mode. 9 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 10 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Rear panel AUDIO DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL AUDIO L R VIDEO VIDEO L R IN DVD IN (PLAY) CD-R REMOTE COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y S VIDEO MD/TAPE CONTROL OUT OUT DVD +12V 15mA MAX. MD/TAPE DTV OUT (REC) DTV IN (PLAY) CBL /SAT R + – A – + + – B – + L DIGITAL INPUT CD DVD FRONT CD-R MONITOR OUT OUT (REC) IN VCR 1 DTV AC OUTLETS L R GND CBL/SAT PHONO SURROUND FRONT IN COAXIAL R R FM ANT 75Ω UNBAL. DVR/ VCR 2 FRONT (6CH)/SB (8CH) + AM ANT OUT CD CENTER – TUNER + – – + L L R L SURROUND CD OUT ZONE 2 SURROUND + CD-R SUB WOOFER DVD R DVR/ VCR 2 SURROUND BACK /PRESENCE SUB WOOFER CENTER MULTI CH INPUT ZONE 3 – – + L PRE OUT GND + CENTER R L – SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS SINGLE PRESENCE/ ZONE 2 MONITOR OUT OUTPUT (U.S.A. model) 1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks See page 19 for details. 2 Audio component jacks See page 19 for connection information. 3 Video component jacks See pages 16 and 18 for connection information. 4 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only) See page 69 for details. 5 CONTROL OUT jack (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only) This is control expansion terminal for commercial use. 6 AC OUTLET(S) Use to supply power to your other A/V components (see page 22). 7 AC INLET (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Use this inlet to plug in the supplied power cable (see page 22). 8 DIGITAL INPUT jacks See pages 16, 18 and 19 for details. 9 MULTI CH INPUT jacks See page 17 for connection information. 10 0 ZONE 2 / ZONE 3 OUTPUT jacks (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only) See page 68 for details. A Antenna terminals See page 21 for connection information. B PRE OUT jacks See page 20 for connection information. C Speaker terminals See page 12 for connection information. D PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models) PRESENCE speaker terminals (other models) See page 12 for connection information. < Asia and General models only > FREQUENCY STEP switch See page 21. VOLTAGE SELECTOR See page 22. 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 11 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SPEAKER SETUP + SPEAKER SETUP Surround back speakers (SBR and SBL) Speaker placement PL PR FL FR C The surround back speakers supplement the surround speakers and provide for more realistic front-to-back transitions. Place these speakers directly behind the listening position and at the same height as the surround speakers. They should be positioned at least 30 cm (12 in) apart. Ideally, they should be positioned at the same width as the front speakers. 30˚ SL SR 60˚ SL 80˚ SBL SR SBR more than 30 cm (12 inches) y The speaker layout above shows the standard ITU-R speaker setting. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP, multi-channel audio sources and THX. 1.8 m (6 ft) 1.8 m (6 ft) The use of a subwoofer, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high fidelity reproduction of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS software. The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. Presence speakers (PR and PL) Presence speakers supplement the sound from the front speakers with extra ambient effects produced by CINEMA DSP (see page 41). These effects include sounds that filmmakers intend to locate a little farther back behind the screen in order to create more theater-like ambience. Place these speakers at the front of the room about 0.5 - 1 m (1 - 3 ft) outside the front speakers, facing slightly inwards, and about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor. ■ Di-pole speaker layout Front speakers (FR and FL) The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. Either di-pole or direct radiating speaker types can be used for THX surround. If you choose di-pole speakers, please place the surround and surround back speakers according to the speaker layout below. FL FR C Center speaker (C) The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. Align the front face of the center speaker with the front face of your video monitor. Place the speaker centrally between the front speakers and as close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under it. Surround speakers (SR and SL) The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor. SL SR 30˚ 30˚ SBL SBR : Di-pole speaker : Direction of di-pole speaker 11 PREPARATION Subwoofer 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 12 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SPEAKER SETUP Speaker connections 5 Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. • • • • CAUTION If you will use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set this unit’s speaker impedance setting to 6 ohms before using (see page 23). Before connecting the speakers, make sure that the power of this unit is off. Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers. Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speakers still creates the interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. One cable is colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridges. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals on this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. 10 mm (3/8") 1 2 Tighten the knob to secure the wire. 5 4 3 Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) Connecting to PRESENCE/ZONE 2 or PRESENCE speaker terminals 1 Open the tab. 1 2 Insert one bare wire into the hole of each terminal. 3 Return the tab to secure the wire. 3 2 Banana plug connections (With the exception of U.K., Europe and Asia models) First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. Banana plug 1 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8") of insulation from the end of each speaker cables. 2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. 3 Unscrew the knob. y Supplied speaker terminal wrench is useful to screw or unscrew knobs. 4 12 Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side of each terminal. (With the exception of U.K., Europe and Asia models) 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 13 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SPEAKER SETUP 9 10 4 2 1 7 3 8 6 Front speakers (A) Right Left 5 Subwoofer system Center speaker Speaker layout 2 R 4 3 + FRONT + – A – + – B – + PREPARATION 1 Front speakers (B) L CENTER – + AC OUTLETS SURROUND R + – – + L L R + SUB WOOFER R + – – + L – SURROUND BACK SINGLE PRESENCE/ ZONE 2 SPEAKERS PRE OUT (U.S.A. model) 7 8 Right Left Surround speakers 5 6 Right Left Surround back speakers 9 10 Right Left Presence speakers You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, but they do not output sound simultaneously. • The surround back speakers output the surround back channel included in Dolby Digital EX and DTS ES software and only operate when the Dolby Digital EX or DTS ES decoder is turned on. • The presence speakers output ambient effects created by the DSP sound fields. They do not output sound when other sound fields are selected. 13 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 14 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SPEAKER SETUP ■ FRONT terminals ■ CENTER terminals Connect one or two speaker systems to these terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either the FRONT A or B terminals. Connect a center speaker to these terminals. Note ■ SUBWOOFER jack The Canada model cannot output to two separate speaker systems simultaneously. Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, to this jack. Bi-wired connection The unit also allows you to make bi-wired connections to one speaker system. Use two pairs of speaker cables for each speaker (one pair for the woofer and one pair for the tweeter/ mid-range). To use the bi-wired connections, press SPEAKERS A and SPEAKERS B on the front panel so that both SP A and B light up on the front panel display. Bi-wired connection ■ SURROUND terminals Connect surround speakers to these terminals. ■ SURROUND BACK terminals Connect surround back speakers to these terminals. If you only connect one surround back speaker, connect it to the left (L) terminals. ■ PRESENCE terminals Connect presence speakers to these terminals. * + – A – + FRONT + – B – + R This unit 14 L If you are using either U.S.A., Canada or Australia model, you can also use these speakers as Zone 2 speakers (see page 57). 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 15 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS Before connecting components CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the mains power until all connections between components are complete. Dust protection cap Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This cap protects the jack from dust. audio signal direction ■ Video jacks video signal direction This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection depends on the availability of input jacks on your monitor. The signals input through the VIDEO jack on this unit can be output through the S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks (see page 56). The signals input through the S VIDEO jack can be output through the VIDEO jack when V CONV. is set to ON (see page 56). For analog signals left analog cables L right analog cables R For digital signals optical cables O coaxial cables C For video signals video cables V S-video cables S V V ■ Analog jacks V You can input analog signals from audio components by connecting audio pin cable to the analog jacks on this unit. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks. ■ Digital jacks This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital signals. VIDEO S VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y VIDEO jack For conventional composite video signals. S VIDEO jack For S-video signals, separated into luminance (Y) and color (C) video signals to achieve high-quality color reproduction. COMPONENT VIDEO jacks For component signals, separated into luminance (Y) and color difference (PB, PR) to provide the best quality in picture reproduction. Note When signals are input through both the S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, signals input through the S VIDEO jack have priority. Note This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus audio signals input to the analog jacks are only output to the analog OUT (REC) jacks. Likewise audio signals input to the digital (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks are only output to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks. 15 PREPARATION ■ Signal directions and cable indications 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 16 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM CONNECTIONS Connecting video components ■ Connections for DVD playback Optical out Video out DVD player Audio out R O L AUDIO DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL R AUDIO L VIDEO VIDEO L R DVD IN (PLAY) CD-R COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y S VIDEO MD/TAPE DVD MD/TAPE DTV OUT (REC) DTV IN (PLAY) CBL /SAT DIGITAL INPUT Video in CD DVD CD-R MONITOR OUT OUT (REC) IN TUNER VCR 1 AM ANT OUT CD M GND CBL/SAT PHONO IN COAXIAL DVR/ VCR 2 MAIN/SURROUND BACK FM ANT SUR CD OUT ZONE 2 SURROUND 75Ω UNBAL. CD-R SUB WOO DVD DTV SUB WOOFER GND CENTER MULCH CH INPUT ZONE 3 MONITOR OUT OUTPUT (U.S.A. model) 16 Video monitor 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 17 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-disc player, external decoder, sound processor or preamplifier. If you set EXT.INPUT 6ch/8ch to “8ch” (see page 55), you can use input jacks assigned in EXT.INPUT FRONT (page 55) together with the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to input 8 channels. Connect the output jacks on your multi-disc player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels. For 6-channel input For 8-channel input AUDIO R SURROUND SURROUND IN (PLAY) AUDIO L R L DVD MD/TAPE DTV SUB WOOFER SUB WOOFER CENTER IN (PLAY) CENTER CBL /SAT MULTI CH INPUT MULTI CH INPUT CD-R IN VCR 1 R L Subwoofer out R L R L Center out Center out Front out Multi-disc player/ External decoder Surround out Subwoofer out Surround back out R L CD Surround out Multi-disc player/ External decoder IN DVR/ VCR 2 R L Front out . Notes • When you select MULTI CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs. • This unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature. • When headphones are used, only front L/R channels are output. 17 PREPARATION FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH) FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH) 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 18 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM CONNECTIONS ■ Connections for other video components Optical out Video out Cable TV or satellite tuner Audio out R O L AUDIO DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL AUDIO L R VIDEO VIDEO L R COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y S VIDEO MD/TAPE DVD IN (PLAY) CD-R DVD MD/TAPE DTV OUT (REC) DTV IN (PLAY) CBL /SAT DIGITAL INPUT CD CD-R CD-R MONITOR OUT OUT (REC) IN TUNER VCR 1 DVD AM ANT OUT CD MA GND CBL/SAT PHONO IN COAXIAL DVR/ VCR 2 MAIN/SURROUND BACK FM ANT SURR CD OUT ZONE 2 SURROUND 75Ω UNBAL. CD-R SUB WOOF DVD DVR/ VCR2 SUB WOOFER GND ZONE 3 CENTER MULCH CH INPUT Connect a YAMAHA CD recorder that outputs OSD signals. MONITOR OUT OUTPUT (U.S.A. model) C R L R L Audio in Video in DVD recorder or VCR Audio out Video out Coaxial out ■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel) Use these jacks to connect any video source, such as a game console or camcorder, to this unit. S VIDEO VIDEO S V L AUDIO R OPTICAL VIDEO AUX L R O Optical out Audio out R Audio out L Video out S video out 18 Game console or video camera 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 19 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM CONNECTIONS Connecting audio components ■ Connections for audio components Optical in MD recorder or tape deck Audio out Audio in O R R L L R PREPARATION AUDIO DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL AUDIO L L R MD/TAPE IN (PLAY) CD-R Optical in MD/TAPE OUT (REC) O DIGITAL INPUT Optical out Audio out CD IN (PLAY) O L CD-R R OUT (REC) Audio out DVD R CD Audio in L CD player R CD recorder* L CBL/SAT PHONO COAXIAL *Some CD recorders can be connected to the VIDEO CD-R jacks (see page 18). MAIN/SURROUND BACK CD C Coaxial out ZONE 2 SURROUND DVD Audio out DTV SUB WOOFER GND L CENTER MULCH CH INPUT ZONE 3 OUTPUT R (U.S.A. model) GND Turntable ■ Connecting a turntable y PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge, use an in-line boosting transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to these jacks. Connect your turntable to the GND terminal to reduce noise in the signal. However you may hear less noise without the connection to the GND terminal for some record players. 19 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 20 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting to an external amplifier If you want to increase the power output to the speakers, or want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks as follows. Notes • When audio pin plugs are connected to the PRE OUT jacks for output to an external amplifier, it is not necessary to use the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. Set the volume of the amplifier connected to this unit to the maximum. • The signal output through the FRONT PRE OUT and CENTER PRE OUT jacks are affected by the TONE CONTROL settings. • Signals will only be output from the FRONT PRE OUT jacks when SPEAKER A is turned off with ZONE B selected for SP B SET (see page 57). L R 1 FRONT R L 2 SURROUND 5 3 SUB WOOFER CENTER R L 4 SURROUND BACK /PRESENCE PRE OUT 1 FRONT PRE OUT jacks Front channel line output jacks. 2 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks Surround channel line output jacks. 3 CENTER PRE OUT jack Center channel line output jack. 4 SURROUND BACK / PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks Surround back or presence channel line output jacks. 5 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, to this jack. Notes • Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signal as the corresponding speaker terminals. However, when both surround back and presence speakers are connected to this unit, the channel of the signals output from SURROUND BACK / PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks may not correspond to the location of the speakers connected through SURROUND BACK / PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks. • Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on the subwoofer. It is also possible to adjust the volume level by using the remote control of this unit (see “Manually adjusting speaker levels” on page 45). • Some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER jack depending on the SPEAKER SET (see page 49) and LFE LEVEL (see page 51) settings. 20 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 21 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM CONNECTIONS Connecting the antennas Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. AM loop antenna (included) Indoor FM antenna (included) Notes • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. • A property installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor antennas. PREPARATION ■ 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model only) COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y VD TV 1 Open the cover of the included 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter. 2 Cut the external sleeve of the 75-ohm coaxial cable and prepare it for connection. ONITOR OUT TUNER AM ANT MAIN GND FM ANT 75Ω UNBAL. SURRO SUB WOOFE Ground (GND terminal) 3 Cut the lead wire and remove it. 4 Insert the cable wire into the slot, and clamp it with pliers. For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. ■ Connecting the AM loop antenna 1 Set up the AM loop antenna, then connect it to the terminals on this unit. 11 (7/16) 8 (5/16) 6 (1/14) Unit: mm (inch) Lead wire Clamp Clamp Insert the wire into slot. 5 2 Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and GND terminals. Snap the cover into place. ■ FREQUENCY STEP switch (Asia and General models only) Because the interstation frequency spacing differs in different areas, set FM AM the FREQUENCY STEP switch (locating on the rear panel) according to the frequency spacing in your area. • North, Central and South America: 100 kHz/10 kHz • Other areas: 50 kHz/9 kHz Before setting this switch, disconnect this unit’s AC power cord from the wall outlet. 100kHz/10kHz 50kHz/9kHz FREQUENCY STEP 3 Orient the AM loop antenna for the best reception. 21 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 22 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM CONNECTIONS Connecting the power supply cord ■ Connecting the AC power cord (U.S.A. and Canada models) Plug the power cord into the AC inlet after all other connections are complete, then plug the power cord to an AC wall outlet. CAUTION AC OUTLETS Do not use other AC power cords. Use the one provided. Use of other power cords may result in fire hazard or electrical shock. (Other models) Plug the power cord into an AC wall outlet. ■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED) (U.S.A. model) VOLTAGE SELECTOR VOLTAGE SELECTOR 2 U.K. and Australia models.............................. 1 OUTLET Korea model............................................................... None Other models.................................................. 2 OUTLETS Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your other components to this unit. Power to the AC OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY). These outlets will supply power to any connected component whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power consumption of components) that can be connected to the AC OUTLET(S) is: Asia and General models .......................................... 50 W Korea model................................................................. N/A Other models ........................................................... 100 W ■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/220/230240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. ■ Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However if the power cord is disconnected from the AC wall outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. (Asia and General models) 22 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 23 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM CONNECTIONS Speaker impedance setting Turning on the power When all connections are complete, turn on the power of this unit. CAUTION If you are using 6 ohm speakers, set the impedance to 6 ohms as follows before turning on the power. 1 Be sure this unit is in the standby mode. VOLUME 1 On the front panel, while pressing down SPEAKERS A, press STANDBY/ON. “SP IMP.SET” appears on the front panel display for a few seconds, then “Minimum 8ohms” appears. STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING OPTIMIZER MIC FM/AM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING EDIT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO INPUT SPEAKERS A VIDEO AUX B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT S VIDEO SILENT CINEMA VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL SPEAKERS A (U.S.A. model) STANDBY /ON TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM 1 POWER PHONO STANDBY TUNER SLEEP INPUT MODE CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD SP IMP.SET SELECT POWER POWER TV AV AMP REC Minimum 8ohms 2 3 1 Press SPEAKERS A or SPEAKERS B to select the impedance of your speakers. You can select either 6 ohms or 8 ohms. Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power of this unit. SYSTEM POWER STANDBY /ON Front panel Press STANDBY/ON to exit the setting. This unit will be set to the standby mode. y You can also use SP IMP.SET (see page 57) to set the speaker impedance. 2 or Remote control Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 23 PREPARATION PROGRAM PHONES 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 24 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM AUTO SETUP AUTO SETUP Introduction This receiver employs YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) technology which lets you avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments. The supplied optimizer microphone collects and analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening environment. Optimizer microphone setup 1 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. (U.S.A. model) PRESET/TUNING OPTIMIZER MIC y FM/AM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING EDIT PROGRAM The basic setup feature (page 28) is useful if you want to set up your system quickly and with minimal effort. However, we recommend that you come back and perform auto setup later to take advantage of YPAO and enjoy even higher fidelity. PHONES MEMORY TUNING MO MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MO INPUT SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT SILENT CINEMA Notes • Loud test tones are output during the auto setup procedure. Please be ready! • If auto setup stops and error messages appear on the OSD, follow the troubleshooting on page 27. YPAO performs the following checks and makes appropriate adjustments to give you the best possible sound from your system. 2 Place the optimizer microphone on a flat level surface with the omni-directional microphone head upward, at your normal listening position. • If possible, use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer mic at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated in your listening position. WIRING Checks which speakers are connected and the polarity of each speaker. DISTANCE Checks the distance of each speaker from the listening position and adjusts the timing of each channel. SIZE Checks the speaker’s frequency response and sets the appropriate low frequency crossover for each channel. EQUALIZING Adjusts frequency and levels of each channel’s parametric equalizer to reduce coloration across the channels and create a cohesive sound field. This is particularly important if you use different brands or sizes of speakers for some channels or have a room with unique sonic characteristics. YPAO equalizing calibration incorporates three parameters (frequency, level and Q factor) for each of the seven bands in its parametric equalizer to provide highly precise automatic adjustment of frequency characteristics. LEVEL Checks and adjusts the sound level (volume) of each speaker. 24 Optimizer microphone position 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 25 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM AUTO SETUP Starting the setup 5 For best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible during the auto setup procedure. If there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be satisfactory. CHECK To automatically check and adjust the selected SKIP y If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the crossover frequency, set the volume to about half way (or slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the maximum. Switch on the receiver and video monitor. Make sure the OSD is displayed. 2 Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press SET MENU to enter the SET MENU. AMP y When using THX speakers, set SIZE to SKIP and make sure that SMALL or SMLx2 is selected in SPEAKER SET (page 49) and that 80Hz is selected in CROSS OVER (page 50). When EQUALIZING is selected, press j / i to select: FRONT To adjust the frequency response of each speaker in accordance with the sound of your front speakers. Recommended if your front speakers are of much higher quality than your other speakers. FLAT To average the frequency response of all speakers. Recommended if all of your speakers are of similar quality. LOW To average the frequency response of all speakers, giving priority to the accuracy of bass frequencies. MID To average the frequency response of all speakers, giving priority to the accuracy of mid-range frequencies. HIGH To average the frequency response of all speakers, giving priority to the accuracy of high frequencies. SKIP To skip the selected item and perform no adjustments. SET MENU then MENU A/B/C/D/E 3 Press u / d to select AUTO SETUP, then press i once to enter the main menu. + TV VOL CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET item. To skip the selected item and perform no adjustments. CH + PRESET TV VOL – SET MENU . ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP p /p : Up/Down - / + : Select 6 Press d to select SETUP, then press j / i to select: AUTO To automatically perform the entire auto setup procedure. STEP To pause for confirmation between each check in the auto setup procedure. RELOAD To restore the last auto setup setting. 7 Press d to select START PUSH +, then press i. Loud test tones will be output from each speaker and WAIT appears during the auto setup procedure. + TV VOL CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TV VOL – 4 Press u / d repeatedly to select WIRING, DISTANCE, SIZE, EQUALIZING or LEVEL. 1 AUTO:MENU .WIRING;;;;;CHECK DISTANCE;;;CHECK SIZE;;;;;;;CHECK EQUALIZING;;FLAT LEVEL;;;;;;CHECK SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO START PUSH + Note If E-10:OTHER ERROR appears during testing, restart the procedure from step 3. p /p : Up/Down - / + : Select 25 PREPARATION 1 When WIRING, DISTANCE, SIZE or LEVEL is selected, press j / i to select: 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 26 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM AUTO SETUP If you selected AUTO in step 6 If you selected RELOAD in step 6 The RESULT display appears for a few seconds after each check, then settings of the next item will start. The RESULT:EXIT display appears after all items are set. The RESULT:EXIT display appears. y You can display each result by pressing u once and pressing i repeatedly before exiting. Pressing d returns to the RESULT:EXIT display. 8 To apply the changes, press j / i to select SET, then press d to exit. To cancel the auto setup procedure, press j / i to select CANCEL, then press d to exit. If you selected STEP in step 6 The RESULT display appears after each check. 8 Press j / i to display RESULT:EXIT, then press j / i to select: NEXT EXIT Then press d to proceed and check the next item. Then press d to exit the auto setup. RESULT:WIRING FRONT L;;;;;;;OK p p RESULT:DISTANCE1 / p p / : Up/Down -/+ : Back/Next RESULT:EQUALIZI. EQ;;;;;FRONT L 63Hz;;;-2.0dB 125Hz;;;-5.0dB 500Hz;;;;;;0dB 630Hz;;;;;;0dB 1.0kHz;;;;;;0dB 3.15kHz;;;+3.0dB 10.0kHz;;;+1.0dB : Up/Down RESULT:LEVEL 1 / : Up/Down -/+ : Back/Next / : Up/Down -/+ : Back/Next p p . FRONT L;;;+5.0dB CENTER;;;;-4.5dB FRONT R;;;+5.5dB PRES L;;;;-3.0dB PRES R;;;;;;--dB p p . FRONT L;;;;3.20m CENTER;;;;;3.30m FRONT R;;;;2.90m PRES L;;;;;1.70m PRES R;;;;;1.50m RESULT:SIZE 1 FRONT L;;;;;;LRG p p / : Up/Down -/+ : Back/Next y • Press u / d repeatedly to move between each display. • If you are not satisfied with the result or want to manually adjust each setup parameter, use the manual setup parameters (see page 49). Notes • If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your listening environment, perform AUTO SETUP again to recalibrate your system. • In the DISTANCE results, the distance displayed may be longer than the actual distance depending on the characteristics of your subwoofer. • In the EQUALIZING results, different values may be set for the same band to provide finer adjustments. 26 y You can display each result by pressing u once and pressing i repeatedly before exiting. Pressing d returns to the RESULT:EXIT display. 8 Press j / i to select SET, then press d to exit. 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 27 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM AUTO SETUP ■ Troubleshooting for auto setup procedure Before auto setup Error message Cause Remedy Connect MIC! Optimizer microphone is not connected. • Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. Unplug HP! Headphones are connected. • Unplug the headphones. During auto setup Press j / i to display the detailed information about the individual error. Select RETRY to try auto setup procedure again. Cause Remedy PREPARATION Error message E-1:NO FRONT SP Front L/R channel signal(s) is (are) not detected. • Select the front speakers with SPEAKER A or B. • Check the front L/R speaker connections. E-2:NO SURR.SP A surround channel signal is not detected. • Check the surround speaker connections. E-3:NO PRES. SP A presence channel signal is not detected. • Check the presence speaker connections. E-4:SBR->SBL Only right surround back channel signal is detected. • Connect the surround back speaker to the LEFT SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS terminal if you only have one surround back speaker. E-5:NOISY Background noise is too loud. • Try auto setup procedure in quiet environment. • Turn off noisy electric equipment like air conditioners (etc.) or move it away from this unit. E-6:CHECK SURR. Surround back speaker(s) is (are) connected, though surround L/R speakers are not. • Connect surround speakers when you use (a) surround back speaker(s). E-7:NO MIC The optimizer microphone was unplugged during the auto setup procedure. • Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. E-8:NO SIGNAL The optimizer microphone does not detect test tones. • Check the microphone setting. • Check the speaker connections and placement. E-9:USER CANCEL The auto setup procedure was cancelled because a setting which affects the auto setup was changed during the procedure. • Perform the auto setup procedure again. After auto setup Press j / i to display the detailed information about the individual warning. Warning message Cause Remedy W-1:OUT OF PHASE Speaker polarity is not correct. This message may appear depending on the speakers even when the speakers are connected correctly. • Check the speaker connections. W-2:OVER 24m (80ft) The distance between the speaker and the listening position is over 24 m (80 ft.). • Bring the speaker closer to the listening position. W-3:LEVEL ERROR The difference of volume level among speakers is excessive. (No level correction is made.) • • • • W-4:SWFR PHASE The phase polarity of the subwoofer is not correct. • We recommend that you select the opposite phase on the subwoofer if the subwoofer has a phase switch. W-5:VOL ERROR The result may not be correct because the volume was changed during the auto setup procedure. • Perform the auto setup procedure again. Do not change the volume during the auto setup procedure. Readjust the speaker installation. Check the speaker connections. Use speakers of similar quality. Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer. • If the warning message W-2 or W-3 appears on the OSD, no corrections are made. In such cases, correct the problem, select CHECK in DISTANCE or LEVEL, then perform the auto setup procedure again. • If the message W-1, W-4 or W-5 appears on the OSD, corrections are made. However, the corrections may not be correct. In such cases, correct the problem, then perform the auto setup procedure again on the relevant setting items. 27 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 28 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM BASIC SETUP BASIC SETUP The basic system parameters are set automatically when you run auto setup (page 24). The basic settings are useful if you want to quickly setup your speakers or to manually adjust some of the items set in auto setup. y 3 Press d once to select BASIC MENU, then press j / i to enter the menu item. 4 When ROOM is selected, press j / i to change the setting. Select the size of the room you have installed your speakers in. Roughly speaking, the room sizes are defined as follows: • If you wish to configure the unit manually using more precise adjustments, use the detailed parameters in the SOUND menu (page 49) instead of using the BASIC menu. • Altering any parameters in the BASIC menu will reset all parameters in the SOUND menu. [U.S.A. and Canada models] S (small) 16 x 13 ft, 200 ft2 (4.8 x 4.0 m, 20 m2) M (medium) 20 x 16 ft, 300 ft2 (6.3 x 5.0 m, 30 m2) L (large) 26 x 19 ft, 450 ft2 (7.9 x 5.8 m, 45 m2) Using BASIC setup REC TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR LEARN AUDIO DISC SKIP SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP + [Other models] S (small) 3.6 x 2.8 m, 10 m2 M (medium) 4.8 x 4.0 m, 20 m2 L (large) 6.3 x 5.0 m, 30 m2 INPUT MODE VOL PHONO TUNER V-AUX DTV CD MULTI CH IN CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD – LEVEL TITLE SET MENU + 1 MUTE MENU TV VOL A/B/C/D/E TV INPUT CH + PRESET TEST 1 2-9 CH TV MUTE SELECT – PRESET ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL SELECT RETURN – DISPLAY EFFECT POWER POWER TV AV STEREO HALL JAZZ ROCK AMP 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 1 BASIC MENU 1/2 REC 1 .ROOM:[SML SWFR:[YESNONE PRESENCE;;;;NONE SPEAKERS;;;;7spk Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press SET MENU to enter the SET MENU. AMP SET MENU then MENU A/B/C/D/E 5 2 Press u / d repeatedly to select MANUAL SETUP, then press j / i to enter the selected category. CH – + + TV VOL TV VOL TV MUTE SELECT PRESET then CH + PRESET CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET TV VOL – SET MENU ;AUTO SETUP . ;MANUAL SETUP p /p : Up/Down - / + : Select If u is pressed when AUTO SETUP is selected, or if d is pressed when MANUAL SETUP is selected, SET MENU will be closed. Press u / d to open SET MENU again. 28 If you have a subwoofer in your system. If you do not have a subwoofer in your system. Press d to select PRESENCE, then press j / i to select: + PRESET TV VOL – YES NONE 6 CH Press d to select SWFR, then press j / i to select: YES NONE If you have presence speakers in your system. If you do not have presence speakers in your system. 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 29 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM BASIC SETUP 7 Press d to select SPEAKERS, then press j / i to select the number of speakers connected to the unit. The choices vary as follows depending on the PRESENCE setting: YES Front L/R L C R SL SB SR 3 — — L C R SL SB SR Front L/R, Center L C R SL SB SR Front L/R, Surround L/R 4 L 5 L C R L SL R R SR L C R SL SR L C R SL SB SR 9 Presence L/R, Front L/R Presence L/R, Front L/R, Center L C R SL SB SR Presence L/R, Front L/R, Surround L/R L C R SL SB SR Presence L/R, Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R L C R SL SB SR Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R . CHECK OK?;;;;YES PREPARATION — L C R SL SB SR 8 NO To exit the setup if the test tones were satisfactory. To adjust each speaker level (see page 50). 1 BASIC MENU 2/2 — 8 YES NONE 2 7 Press d to select CHECK OK?, then press j / i to select: PRESENCE setting Choices 6 9 (when NO is selected) B)SPEAKER LEVEL . FR C SL + Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R, Surround back Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R, Surround back L/R Presence L/R, Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R, Surround back — — Presence L/R, Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R, Surround back L/R — — Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However, if the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the items again. After you have finished the settings, press d, then press j / i to select: SET CANCEL To apply the changes. To cancel the setup. 1 BASIC MENU 2/2 . [SET CANCEL ROOM SIZE=SMALL If you select SET, you will hear a test tone from each speaker. 29 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 30 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM PLAYBACK PLAYBACK Basic operations 4 1 6 Select the input source. Use INPUT (or press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the input you desire. INPUT or PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX DTV CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD VOLUME STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING OPTIMIZER MIC FM/AM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING EDIT PROGRAM PHONES MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO Front panel A Remote control INPUT SPEAKERS VIDEO AUX B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT The current input source name and input mode appear in the front panel display and video monitor for a few seconds. EFFECT S VIDEO SILENT CINEMA VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL (U.S.A. model) 3 4 1 4 4 7 V–AUX RE–NAME CLEAR AUDIO DISC SKIP SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R + 6 VOL DTV Selected input source – LEVEL TITLE SET MENU + DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER PHONO AUTO L R Input mode MUTE MENU TV VOL A/B/C/D/E TV INPUT DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD CH CH TV MUTE SELECT – PRESET + 5 Start playback or select a broadcast station on the source component. Refer to the operation instructions for the component. 6 Adjust the volume to the desired output level. PRESET TEST ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL SELECT 7 CBL/SAT DVD SP A LEARN PHONO VCR 1 VOLUME REC TRANSMIT DVR/VCR2 RETURN – DISPLAY EFFECT POWER POWER TV AV STEREO AMP REC HALL JAZZ ROCK 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 NIGHT EX/ES +10 ENTER THX /DTS 9 0 7 CHP/INDEX VOLUME 1 + Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power. or VOL – SYSTEM POWER STANDBY /ON or Remote control Front panel Front panel Remote control 7 2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 3 Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel. Each press turns the respective speakers on or off. Select a sound field program if desired. Use PROGRAM (or press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press one of the sound field program buttons repeatedly) to select a sound field program. See page 41 for details about sound field programs. PROGRAM or SPEAKERS A B AMP ROCK STEREO HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 THX 9 6 /DTS 0 7 8 NIGHT EX/ES +10 ENTER CHP/INDEX Front panel Remote control y When bi-wiring, select both A and B. Dialog Normalisation When this unit detects Dolby Digital signals, the following display appears for a few seconds. This shows how the signal level is being corrected to become the reference level (-27 dB, THX recommendation). DialNorm;;+4dB 30 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 31 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM PLAYBACK To listen with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) The SILENT CINEMA mode allows you to enjoy multichannel music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS surround, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA activates automatically whenever you connect headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs. The “SILENT CINEMA” indicator lights up on the front panel display. (If the sound field programs are off, you listen with normal stereo reproduction.) ■ Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT Press MULTI CH INPUT so that “MULTI CH INPUT” appears in the front panel display and video monitor. MULTI CH INPUT MULTI CH IN or Front panel Remote control Note This unit will not be set to the SILENT CINEMA mode when MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source. To adjust the tone PROGRAM ■ Playing video sources in the background You can combine a video image from a video source with a sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music while having beautiful scenery from the video source on the video monitor. Use the input selector buttons to select a video source, then select an audio source. Audio sources Notes • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the lowfrequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the surround speakers may not match that of the front left/right and center speakers. • TONE CONTROL is not effective when THX (page 41) or DIRECT STEREO (page 33) program is selected, or when MULTI CH INPUT is selected. • TONE CONTROL is not effective for headphones. Use HP TONE CTRL to adjust bass/treble balance for the headphones (page 53). PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX DTV CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Video sources Note If you want to enjoy an audio source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video source and then press MULTI CH INPUT. To mute the sound Press MUTE on the remote control. MUTE “MUTE” blinks on the front panel display. To resume the audio output, press MUTE again. (or press VOL –/+). “MUTE” disappears from the display. y You can adjust the muting level (see page 53). 31 BASIC OPERATION You can adjust the bass/treble balance for the front left/right and center channels. Press TONE CONTROL repeatedly on the front panel to select TREBLE or BASS. Select TREBLE, then rotate PROGRAM to the right or left to increase or decrease the highfrequency response. Select BASS, then rotate PROGRAM to the right or left to increase or decrease the low-frequency response. To cancel the tone control, press TONE CONTROL repeatedly to select BYPASS. TONE CONTROL Note When “MULTI CH INPUT” is shown on the front panel display and/or the video monitor, no other source can be played. To select another input source with INPUT (or one of the input selector buttons), press MULTI CH INPUT to turn off “MULTI CH INPUT” from the front panel display and the video monitor. 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 32 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM PLAYBACK y Selecting sound field programs Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, and not on the name of the program. ■ Front panel operation Notes VOLUME STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING OPTIMIZER MIC FM/AM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING EDIT PROGRAM PHONES MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO INPUT SPEAKERS A VIDEO AUX B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT S VIDEO SILENT CINEMA VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with that source. • Sound field programs cannot be selected when the MULTI CH INPUT is selected. • Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz (except for DTS 96/ 24 signals) will be sampled down to 48 kHz, then sound field programs will be applied. ■ Enjoying multi-channel software (U.S.A. model) PROGRAM Rotate PROGRAM to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears on the front panel display and on the video monitor. PROGRAM If you connected a surround back speaker, use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS ES decoders. Press EX/ES on the remote control to switch between 5.1- and 6.1/7.1- channel playback. EX/ES ENTER CHP/INDEX V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER PHONO To select a decoder, press l/h repeatedly when PLIIx Movie (etc.) is displayed. VOLUME HiFi DSP JAZZ CLUB SP A L R Program name ■ Remote control operation LEVEL MUTE SET MENU + TITLE MENU TV VOL TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN A/B/C/D/E TV INPUT LEARN CH TV MUTE SELECT – PRESET CH + PRESET TEST ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL – RETURN DISPLAY EFFECT V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD STEREO HALL JAZZ ROCK 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 NIGHT EX/ES /DTS THX 9 0 +10 POWER POWER TV AV Sound field program buttons ENTER CHP/INDEX SELECT AMP AMP REC AUDIO Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press one of the sound field program buttons repeatedly to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears on the front panel display and on the video monitor. ROCK STEREO HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 THX 9 6 /DTS 0 7 8 NIGHT EX/ES +10 DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER PHONO VOLUME HiFi DSP SP A JAZZ CLUB program name 32 Decoders (select with l/h) You can select from the following modes depending on the format of the software you are playing. PLIIx Movie For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx movie decoder. PLIIx Music For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx music decoder. EX/ES For playing back Dolby Digital signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital Surround EX decoder. DTS signals are played back in 6.1/7.1 channels using the DTS ES decoder. EX For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/ 7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital Surround EX decoder. OFF (OFF) For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 5.1 channels. ENTER CHP/INDEX V–AUX AUTO (AUTO) When a signal (flag) that can be recognized by the unit is input, the unit selects the optimum decoder for playing back the signal in 6.1/7.1 channels. If the unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present in the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in 6.1/ 7.1 channels. L R y When SURR B L/R SP is set to “LRGx1” or “SMLx1” (see page 49), the surround back channel will be output from the left SURROUND BACK speaker terminals. 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 33 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM PLAYBACK Notes Note • Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal (flag) which this unit can automatically detect. When playing these kinds of discs with 6.1-channel, select “ON”. • 6.1-channel playback is not possible even if EX/ES is pressed in the following cases: – When SURR B L/R SP is set to “NONE” (see page 49). – When the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jack is being played. – When the source being played does not contain surround L/R channel signals. – When Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played. – When “2ch Stereo”, “7ch Stereo” or “Direct Stereo” is selected. • When the power of this unit is turned off, the input mode will be reset to AUTO. • When the DTS ES decoder is applied to DTS 96/24 signals, you cannot use the DTS 96/24 decoding feature. • The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when SURR B L/R SP is set to “NONE” (see page 49). • “PLIIx Movie” cannot be selected when SURR B L/R SP is set to “LRGx1” or “SMLx1” (see page 49). The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when SURR B L/R SP is set to “NONE” (see page 49). ■ Listening to high fidelity stereo sound (Direct Stereo) Direct Stereo allows you to bypass this unit’s decoders and DSP processors to enjoy pure high fidelity sound from 2channel PCM and analog sources. Rotate PROGRAM (or press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press STEREO repeatedly) to select DIRECT STEREO. PROGRAM or /DTS 0 You can select from the following modes depending on the type of software you are playing and your personal preference. PRO LOGIC SUR. STANDARD Standard processing for Dolby Surround sources. PRO LOGIC SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for Dolby Surround sources PRO LOGIC IIx Movie * Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for movie software. PRO LOGIC IIx Music * Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for music software. PRO LOGIC IIx Game * Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for game software. JAZZ 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 9 6 /DTS 7 8 NIGHT EX/ES +10 0 ENTER CHP/INDEX Front panel Remote control Direct Stereo Notes • To avoid unexpected noise, do not play DTS-encoded CDs in this mode. • When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, this unit automatically selects an analog signal input. (When DTS is selected as an input mode, no sound will be heard.) • No sound will be output from the subwoofer. • TONE CONTROL (page 31) and SET MENU (page 47) settings are not effective. • The front panel display automatically dims. ■ Listening at night This mode reproduces dialogue clearly while reducing the volume of loud sound effects for easier listening at low volumes or at night. Press NIGHT on the remote control. The NIGHT indicator in the front panel display lights up. Press NIGHT again to cancel. The NIGHT indicator goes off. NIGHT +10 y • You can use the night listening mode with any sound field programs except Direct Stereo (even though the NIGHT indicator lights up during Direct Stereo mode). • Night listening mode may vary in effectiveness depending on the input source and surround sound settings you use. DTS Neo:6 Cinema DTS processing for movie software. DTS Neo:6 Music DTS processing for music software. * Use the PLII/PLIIx parameter to select the Pro Logic II or Pro Logic IIx decoders (see page 76). 33 BASIC OPERATION Press q/DTS on the remote control to select the decoder. HALL 1 THX ■ Enjoying 2-channel software Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played back on multiple channels. ROCK STEREO 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 34 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM PLAYBACK ■ Downmixing to 2 channels You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback even from multichannel sources. Rotate PROGRAM (or press STEREO on the remote control) to select 2ch Stereo. PROGRAM or Selecting input modes This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Do the following to select the type of input signals you want to use. ROCK STEREO HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 NIGHT EX/ES +10 ENTER 1 Select the input source. INPUT THX 9 /DTS 0 CHP/INDEX Front panel PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX DTV CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD or Remote control Front panel Remote control 2ch Stereo y You can use a subwoofer with this program when SWFR or BOTH is selected in LFE/BASS OUT. 2 ■ Listening to unprocessed input signals Press INPUT MODE to select an input mode. In most cases, use AUTO. TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR LEARN INPUT MODE Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to select STRAIGHT. Two channel stereo sources are output from only the front left and right speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing. SYSTEM or Front panel POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN Remote control STRAIGHT STRAIGHT or V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R EFFECT CD TUNER PHONO VOLUME EFFECT Front panel Remote control SP A DVD AUTO L R Input mode AUTO Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT again so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the display when you want to turn the sound effect back on. DTS ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field. If you do not connect surround speakers, Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program. Note Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate, even when SURR L/R SP is set to “NONE” (see page 49) in the following cases: – When MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source. – When headphones are connected. 34 ANALOG Automatically selects input signals in the following order: 1) Digital signals* 2) Analog signals Selects only digital signals encoded in DTS. If no DTS signals are input, no sound is output. Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are input, no sound is output. * If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate sound field program. y You can adjust the default input mode this unit selects when the power is turned on (see page 54). 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 35 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM PLAYBACK Notes 3 • When you play DTS encoded sources with the input mode set to AUTO: – This unit automatically switches to the DTS decoding mode. The unit remains in DTS mode (and the “t” indicator may flash) for up to 30 second after playback of the DTS source is complete. To manually release the DTS mode, press INPUT MODE to reselect AUTO. – The DTS decoding mode may be released if search or skip operations are performed for more than 30 seconds. To prevent this, press INPUT MODE to select DTS. • If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection between this unit and the player. Press u / d to display the following information about the input signal. + TV VOL CH – 1 (Format) in fs CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD rate flg 2 Signal format display. When the unit cannot detect a digital signal it automatically switches to analog input. Number of source channels in the input signal. For example, a multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is displayed as “3/2/ LFE”. Sampling frequency. When the unit is unable to detect the sampling frequency “Unknown” appears. Bit rate. When the unit is unable to detect the bit rate “Unknown” appears. Flag data encoded with DTS or Dolby Digital signals that cue this unit to automatically switch decoders. Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press STRAIGHT/EFFECT so that “STRAIGHT” appears in the display. STRAIGHT AMP then EFFECT 35 BASIC OPERATION TUNER + – Select the input source. PHONO CH PRESET TV VOL Displaying the information about the input source You can display the type, format and sampling frequency of the current input signal. TV MUTE SELECT PRESET 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 36 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM TUNING TUNING Automatic and manual tuning 4 There are 2 tuning methods; automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. ■ Automatic tuning Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin automatic tuning. Press h to tune in to a higher frequency, or press l to tune in to a lower frequency. VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD PRESET/TUNING TUN AUTO TUNED A~~AM~1530 kHz When tuned in to a station, the “TUNED” indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown on the front panel display. VOLUME STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING OPTIMIZER MIC FM/AM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING EDIT PROGRAM PHONES MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO ■ Manual tuning SPEAKERS A If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, you must tune into it manually. Manually tuning in to an FM station will automatically change the reception mode to monaural to increase the signal quality. INPUT VIDEO AUX B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT S VIDEO SILENT CINEMA (U.S.A. model) 1 32 4 1 VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL 3 1 Select TUNER and the reception band following steps 1 and 2 as described in “Automatic tuning”. 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator disappears from the front panel display. Rotate INPUT (or press TUNER on the remote control) to select TUNER as the input source. INPUT PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD or Front panel Remote control AUTO TUNING MODE Disappears AUTO/MAN'L MONO 2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display. If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn the colon (:) off. FM/AM or PRESET/TUNING VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNE TUNED 3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the front panel display. AUTO TUNING MODE Lights up AUTO/MAN'L MONO VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUN AUTO TUNED EDIT 36 3 A~~AM~1440 kHz Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune in to the desired station manually. Hold down the button to continue searching. PRESET/TUNING If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn the colon (:) off. PRESET/TUNING EDIT A~~AM~1440 kHz 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 37 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM TUNING Notes Presetting stations ■ Automatically presetting FM stations You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store FM stations. This function enables this unit to automatically tune in to FM stations with strong signals, and to store up to 40 (8 stations x 5 groups, A1-E8) of those stations in order. You can then recall any preset station easily by selecting the preset station number. Automatic preset tuning options VOLUME PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING EDIT PROGRAM PHONES MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO INPUT SPEAKERS A VIDEO AUX B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT S VIDEO SILENT CINEMA (U.S.A. model) 1 1 VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL 3 2 Press FM/AM to select the FM band. FM/AM 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the front panel display. AUTO TUNING MODE Lights up AUTO/MAN'L MONO 3 Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If so, store the stations again by using the presetting station methods. Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) for more than 3 seconds. The preset number, the “MEMORY” and “AUTO” indicators flash. After about 5 seconds, automatic presetting starts from the frequency currently displayed and proceeds toward the higher frequencies. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER AUTO MEMORY SP A A1:FM 87.5 MHz PHONO VOLUME L R When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. 37 BASIC OPERATION You can select the preset number from which this unit will store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower frequencies. After pressing MEMORY in step 3: 1 Press A/B/C/D/E, then PRESET/TUNING l / h to select the preset number under which the first station will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when stations have all been stored up to E8. 2 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon (:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin tuning toward lower frequencies. STANDBY /ON OPTIMIZER MIC • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • If the number of the received stations does not reach 40 (E8) E8, automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after searching all stations. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune in to it manually in the monaural mode, and store it by following the procedure in “Manually presetting stations”. 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 38 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM TUNING ■ Manually presetting stations You can also store up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5 groups) manually. 4 VOLUME Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a preset station number (1 to 8) while the “MEMORY” indicator is flashing. Press h to select a higher preset station number. Press l to select a lower preset station number. STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING OPTIMIZER MIC FM/AM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING EDIT PROGRAM PHONES MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PRESET/TUNING INPUT SPEAKERS A VIDEO AUX B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT S VIDEO SILENT CINEMA VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL (U.S.A. model) 3 4 2,5 V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER PHONO VOLUME TUNED MEMORY SP A 1 Tune in to a station. See page 36 for tuning instructions. V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER PHONO 5 VOLUME TUNED SP AB A :AM 630 kHz L R When tuned in to a station, the front panel display shows the frequency of the station received. 2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM). The “MEMORY” indicator flashes for about 5 seconds. C3:AM 630 kHz L R Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the front panel while the “MEMORY” indicator is flashing. The station band and MEMORY frequency appear on the front MAN'L/AUTO FM panel display with the preset group and number you have selected. V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER PHONO VOLUME TUNED MEMORY MEMORY SP A MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM C3:AM 630 kHz L R Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3. Flashes 6 3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E) while the “MEMORY” indicator is flashing. The group letter appears. Check that the colon (:) appears on the front panel display. A/B/C/D/E V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER PHONO VOLUME TUNED MEMORY SP A 38 C :AM 630 kHz L R Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations. Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 39 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM TUNING Selecting preset stations Exchanging preset stations You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the preset station number under which it was stored. You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. The example below describes the procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”. VOLUME VOLUME STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING MEMORY TUNING MODE STANDBY /ON OPTIMIZER MIC EDIT MAN'L/AUTO FM PROGRAM PHONES AUTO/MAN'L MONO INPUT PRESET/TUNING SPEAKERS A FM/AM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO VIDEO AUX B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT OPTIMIZER MIC EDIT PROGRAM EFFECT S VIDEO SILENT CINEMA VIDEO L AUDIO R INPUT OPTICAL PHONES SPEAKERS A VIDEO AUX B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT S VIDEO SILENT CINEMA 2,4 TITLE SET MENU + MUTE MENU TV VOL A/B/C/D/E TV INPUT CH – CH TV MUTE SELECT + PRESET PRESET TEST ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN – DISPLAY 1 2 AUDIO R OPTICAL (U.S.A. model) 1,3 1,3 Select preset station “E1” by using the A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h. See “Selecting preset stations”. 2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for more than 3 seconds. “E1” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the front panel display. Press A/B/C/D/E to select the preset station group. The preset group letter appears on the front panel display and changes each time you press the button. CR2 PRESET/TUNING VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD BASIC OPERATION 1 EFFECT 1 L (U.S.A. model) 1 2 LEVEL VIDEO TUNER VO TUNED MEMORY A/B/C/D/E E1:FM 87.5 MHz SET MENU or EDIT MENU A/B/C/D/E Front panel 2 Remote control 3 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (PRESET j / i on the remote control) to select a preset station number (1 to 8). The preset group and number appear on the front panel display along with the station band, frequency and the “TUNED” indicator lights up. + or CH CH TV MUTE SELECT – V–AUX + PRESET PRESET DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER PHONO VOLUME TUNED MEMORY SP AB 4 TV VOL PRESET/TUNING Select preset station “A5” by using A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h. “A5” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the front panel display. A5:FM 90.6 MHz L R Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again. The stations stored at the two preset assignments are exchanged. TV VOL – Front panel Remote control PRESET/TUNING EDIT V–AUX DVR/VCR2 SP A VCR 1 CBL/SAT EDIT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R E1-A5 Shows the exchange of stations is complete. CR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER VO TUNED E1:FM 87.5 MHz 39 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 40 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM RECORDING RECORDING Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operation instructions for those components. VOLUME STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING OPTIMIZER MIC FM/AM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING EDIT PROGRAM PHONES MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO INPUT SPEAKERS A VIDEO AUX B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT S VIDEO SILENT CINEMA VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL (U.S.A. model) 1 2 1 Turn on the power of this unit and all connected components. 2 Select the source component you want to record from. INPUT PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD or Front panel Remote control 3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the source component. 4 Start recording on the recording component. 40 Notes • Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. • When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. • The setting of TONE CONTROL, VOLUME, “Speaker level” (page 50) and programs does not affect the recorded material. • A source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. • S-video and composite video signals pass independently through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals, if your video source component is connected to provide only an S-video (or only a composite video) signal, you can record only an S-video (or only a composite video) signal to your VCR. • A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not output on VCR 1 OUT.) • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. ■ Special considerations when recording DTS software The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. For LDs, DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your player is compatible with the DTS format, follow its operation instruction to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player. 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 41 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multichannel playback from almost any sound source (stereo or multichannel). This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience. Most of these sound field programs are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments found in famous concert halls, music venues, and movie theaters. y The Yamaha CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set INPUT MODE to AUTO (see page 34) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal. For movie/video sources You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked “MULTI” can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked “2-CH” can be used with 2-channel (stereo) sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc. Program Features Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 (left and right) channels or plays back 2-channel sources as is. MOVIE THEATER: Spectacle CINEMA DSP processing. This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions). MOVIE THEATER: Sci-Fi CINEMA DSP processing. This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. MOVIE THEATER: Adventure CINEMA DSP processing. This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. MOVIE THEATER: General CINEMA DSP processing. This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by soft and extensive sound field. The presence sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining the echo effect of conversations without losing clarity. THX Cinema THX processing for any multi-channel sources. THX Surr. EX THX processing for Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital EX sources. This program is available only when surround back L/R speakers are connected to this unit and when the input source contains surround back channel signals. dts ES+THX THX processing for DTS ES sources. DOLBY DIGITAL: SUR. STANDARD Standard 5.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources. DOLBY DIGITAL: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for Dolby Digital sources. q D+PLIIx Movie: SUR. STANDARD Standard 6.1/7.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources. q D+PLIIx Movie: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1/7.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources. DOLBY D EX: SUR. STANDARD Standard 6.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources. MULTI 2-CH MULTI 41 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS STEREO: 2ch Stereo Sources 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 42 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS Program Features DOLBY D EX: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1 channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for Dolby Digital sources. DTS: SUR. STANDARD Standard 5.1 channel processing for DTS and 96kHz/24-bit DTS sources. DTS: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for DTS sources. DTS+PLIIx Movie: SUR. STANDARD Standard 6.1/7.1 channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic IIx) for DTS sources. DTS+PLIIx Movie: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1/7.1 channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic IIx) for DTS sources. DTS+DOLBY EX: SUR. STANDARD Standard 6.1 channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources. DTS+DOLBY EX: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1 channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources. DTS ES Mtrx 6.1: SUR. STANDARD Standard 6.1 channel processing (DTS ES Matrix) for DTS sources. DTS ES Mtrx 6.1: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced processing (DTS ES Matrix) for DTS sources. DTS ES Dscrt 6.1: SUR. STANDARD Standard 6.1 channel processing (DTS ES Discrete) for DTS sources. DTS ES Dscrt 6.1: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced processing (DTS ES Discrete) for DTS sources. PRO LOGIC: SUR. STANDARD Standard processing for Dolby Surround sources. PRO LOGIC: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced precessing for Dolby Surround sources. PRO LOGIC IIx: PLIIx Movie Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie software. PRO LOGIC II: PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie software. PRO LOGIC IIx: PLIIx Game Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for game software. PRO LOGIC II: PLII Game Dolby Pro Logic II processing for game software. DTS: Neo:6 Cinema DTS processing for movie software. 42 Sources MULTI 2-CH 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 43 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS For music sources You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc. Program Features CONCERT HALL HiFi DSP processing. A classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 1700 seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which produce a very full, rich sound. JAZZ CLUB HiFi DSP processing. This is the sound field at stage front in “The bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering a real and vibrant sound. ROCK CONCERT HiFi DSP processing. The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of the hall. ENTERTAINMENT: Disco HiFi DSP processing. This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by highenergy, “immediate” sound. q D+PLIIx Music: SUR. STANDARD Standard Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources. q D+PLIIx Music: SUR. ENHANCED DSP enhanced Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources. DTS+PLIIx Music: SUR. STANDARD Standard DTS and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources. DTS+PLIIx Music: SUR. ENHANCED DSP enhanced DTS and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources. STEREO: 2ch Stereo 2 (left and right) channel playback. STEREO: Direct Stereo Use to output stereo sources to only the front left and right speakers without any processing. STEREO: 7ch Stereo Use to increase the output stereo sources (in stereo) from all speakers. This provides a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc. PRO LOGIC IIx: PLIIx Music Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music software. PRO LOGIC II: PLII Music Dolby Pro Logic II processing for music software. DTS: Neo:6 Music DTS processing for music software. Sources MULTI 2-CH MULTI 2-CH ADVANCED OPERATION 43 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 44 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM ADVANCED OPERATIONS ADVANCED OPERATIONS Selecting the OSD mode Using the sleep timer You can display this unit’s operating information on a video monitor. If you display the SET MENU and sound field program parameter settings on a monitor, it is much easier to see the available options and parameters than it is by reading this information on the front panel display. 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 2 Press ON SCREEN repeatedly to change the OSD mode. The OSD mode changes in the following order: full display, short DISPLAY display, and display off. Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off any external components connected to the AC OUTLET(S). ■ Setting the sleep timer TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM ON SCREEN POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD 2 SELECT POWER POWER TV AV AMP Full display Always shows the sound field program parameter settings as well as the contents of the front panel display. 1 Short display Briefly shows the contents of the front panel display at the bottom of the screen each time you operate this unit. Select a source and start playback on the source component. 2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to SLEEP set the amount of time. Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. The SLEEP indicator flashes while switching the amount of time for sleep timer. Display off P02 CONCERT HALL .DSPLEVEL;;;;0dB INITDLY;;;;30ms ROOMSIZE;;;;1.0 LIVENESS;;;;;;;5 SLEEP 120 min. P02CONCERTHALL Full display SLEEP OFF SLEEP 90 min. SLEEP 30 min. SLEEP 60 min. Short display V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER PHONO VOLUME SLEEP Notes • The OSD signal is not output to the REC OUT jack, and will not be recorded. • You can set the OSD to turn on (gray background) or off when a video source is not being reproduced (or the source component is turned off) by using “Display set” (see page 56). SP A HiFi DSP SLEEP 120min L R The “SLEEP” indicator lights up on the front panel display after the sleep timer has been set. SLEEP Indicator V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER PHONO VOLUME SLEEP SP A 44 HiFi DSP CONCERT HALL L R 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 45 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM ADVANCED OPERATIONS ■ Canceling the sleep timer Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears on the front panel display. After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, and the “SLEEP” indicator goes off. SLEEP y The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) to set this unit to the standby mode. Manually adjusting speaker levels You can adjust the output level of each speaker while listening to a music source. This is also possible when playing sources through the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Please note that this operation will override the level adjustments made in “AUTO SETUP” (page 24), “Speaker level” (page 50) and “Using the test tone” (page 46). POWER POWER TV AV AMP 1 REC AUDIO + DISC SKIP VOL – 2 LEVEL TITLE SET MENU + MUTE MENU TV VOL A/B/C/D/E TV INPUT CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TEST ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN – DISPLAY EFFECT 3 1 Press AMP to select the AMP mode. 2 Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the speaker you want to adjust. FRONT L CENTER FRONT R SUR.R SUR.B.R SUR.B.L SUR.L SWFR PRES AMP LEVEL TITLE TV INPUT Front left speaker level Center speaker level Front right speaker level Surround right speaker level Surround back right speaker level Surround back left speaker level Surround left speaker level Subwoofer level Presence speaker level y 3 Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level. • The control range is from +10 dB to –10 dB. + TV VOL CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TV VOL – Note When inputting digital signals with sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz, only the subwoofer level can be adjusted. 45 ADVANCED OPERATION Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker by pressing u / d. 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 46 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM ADVANCED OPERATIONS If you do not use the presence speakers Using the test tone You can use the test tone feature to manually balance your speaker levels. Please note that this operation will override the level adjustments made in “AUTO SETUP” (page 24), “Speaker level” (page 50) and “Manually adjusting speaker levels” (page 45). Use the test tone to set speaker levels so that the volume from each speaker is identical when heard from your listening position. 5 Press TEST when you have completed your adjustment. The test tone stops. Note If PRESENCE is set to YES, press TEST twice to stop the test tone. If you use the presence speakers y • Use a handheld SPL meter, hold at arms length and point upwards so that the meter is in the listening position. With the meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW, calibrate each speaker to 75 dB. • Before outputting the test tone, we recommend that you set the output volume to 0 dB. 5 TEST TEST TEST TEST Note You cannot enter test mode if headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. Remove the headphones from the PHONES jack. POWER POWER TV AV AMP 1 REC AUDIO DISC SKIP + Press TEST. The unit will output a test tone. FRONT PRESENCE PRES L PRES R Front speakers Presence speakers Presence left speaker Presence right speaker 6 Press u / d repeatedly to select the speaker you want to adjust. 7 Press j / i to adjust speaker volumes. 8 Press TEST when you have completed your adjustment. The test tone stops. VOL – LEVEL SET MENU + TITLE 4 A/B/C/D/E TV INPUT CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET 2,5 MUTE MENU TV VOL CH + PRESET TEST ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN – DISPLAY 3 EFFECT 1 Press AMP to select the AMP mode. 2 Press TEST. The unit will output a test tone. TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST LEFT CENTER RIGHT R SUR. R SUR. B L SUR. B L SUR. SUBWOOFER Front left speaker Center speaker Front right speaker Right surround speaker Right surround back speaker Left surround back speaker Left surround speaker Subwoofer 3 Press u / d repeatedly to select the speaker you want to adjust. 4 Press j / i to adjust speaker volumes. 46 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 47 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SET MENU SET MENU You can use the following parameters in the set menu to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. ■ Auto Setup Use to specify which speaker parameters auto setup will adjust, and to activate the auto setup procedure (see page 24). ■ Manual Setup Use to manually adjust speaker and system settings. y Most of the parameters described in the SOUND menu are set automatically when you run auto setup (see page 24). You can use the SOUND menu to make further adjustments, but we recommend running auto setup first. Basic menu Use to quickly setup basic system parameters (see page 28). Sound menu Use to manually adjust any speaker setting or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. Item Features Page Selects the output mode suitable for each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the cross over frequency. 49 SP LEVEL Adjusts the output level of each speaker. 50 SP DISTANCE Adjusts the delay time of each speaker. 51 GRAPHIC EQ Adjusts the tonal quality of each speaker. 51 LFE LEVEL Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 51 DYNAMIC RANGE Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 52 LOW FRQ. TEST Matches the subwoofer level with the level of the other speakers. 52 HP TONE CTRL Adjusts the tonal balance of the headphones. 53 AUDIO SET Customizes overall audio settings of this unit. 53 Selects priority to either surround back or presence speakers when both sets of speakers are PR/SBch SELECT connected to this unit. ADVANCED OPERATION SPEAKER SET 53 Input menu Use to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input mode, rename your inputs, or specify external input settings. Item Features Page I/O ASSIGN Assigns jacks according to the component to be used. 54 INPUT MODE Selects the initial input mode of the source. 54 INPUT RENAME Changes the name of the inputs. 55 EXT.INPUT Sets the direction of the signals input into the center, subwoofer and surround channels for the source component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. 55 47 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 48 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SET MENU Option menu Use to adjust the optional system settings. Item Features Page DISPLAY SET Adjusts the OSD and converts video signals. 56 MEMORY GUARD Locks sound field program parameters and other SET MENU settings. 56 PARAM. INI Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs. 57 SP IMP. SET Selects the impedance of your speakers. 57 ZONE SET Specifies the location of the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals. 57 ZONE2 SET Selects the Zone 2 mode. 58 Using SET MENU 3 Press u / d repeatedly to select a menu, then press j / i to enter the menu item. Repeat this operation to navigate to and enter the setup mode of the item you want to adjust. 4 Press j / i repeatedly to change the setting of the item you want to adjust. 5 To exit, press u / d repeatedly until the menu disappears or just press one of the sound field program group buttons. Use the remote control to access and adjust each parameter. POWER POWER TV AV AMP 1 REC AUDIO + DISC SKIP VOL – LEVEL MUTE SET MENU + TITLE MENU TV VOL 2,3,4 TV INPUT A/B/C/D/E CH TV MUTE SELECT – PRESET CH + PRESET TEST ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL – RETURN DISPLAY 2,3,5 EFFECT STEREO 5 HALL ROCK JAZZ 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 NIGHT EX/ES +10 ENTER /DTS THX 9 0 + TV VOL CHP/INDEX CH 1 2 – Press AMP to select the AMP mode. AMP CH – + TV VOL then CH + CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TV VOL TV VOL – – SET MENU . ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP p p / : Up/Down - / + : Select If u is pressed when AUTO SETUP is selected, or if d is pressed when MANUAL SETUP is selected, SET MENU will be closed. Press u / d to open SET MENU again. 48 + or ROCK STEREO HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 NIGHT EX/ES PRESET – + PRESET CH THX TV VOL TV MUTE SELECT PRESET TV VOL Press u / d to select AUTO SETUP or MANUAL SETUP, then press j / i to enter the selected category. PRESET TV MUTE SELECT 9 /DTS 0 +10 ENTER CHP/INDEX Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However, if the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the items again. 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 49 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SET MENU Manual setup: SOUND Surround left/right speakers SURR L/R SP Choices: LARGE, SMALL, NONE Use to manually adjust any speaker setting or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. Most of the SOUND parameters are set automatically when you run auto setup (see page 24). 2 SOUND MENU /p : Up/Down - / + : Select p . A)SPEAKERSET B)SPEAKERLEVEL C)SPDISTANCE D)GRAFICEQ ■ Speaker set SPEAKER SET Use to manually adjust any speaker setting. Note Set any THX speakers to SMALL. MANUAL SETUP > SOUND MENU > SPEAKER SET > Center speaker CENTER SP Choices: LARGE, SMALL, NONE CENTER SP SURR L/R SP NONE [SML LRG • Select LARGE if you have large surround left and right speakers or if a rear subwoofer is connected to the surround speakers. The entire range of the surround channel signal is directed to the surround left and right speakers. • Select SMALL if you have small surround left and right speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround channel are directed to the speakers selected with “BASS OUT”. • Select NONE if you do not have surround speakers. This will set the unit to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 34) and automatically set the surround back speaker setting (SURR B L/R SP below) to NONE. Surround back left/right speakers SURR B L/R SP Choices: LRGx2, LRGx1, SMLx2, SMLx1, NONE SURR B L/R SP NONE [SML LRG Front speakers FRONT SP Choices: LARGE, SMALL FRONT SP [SMALL LARGE • Select LARGE if you have large front speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the front left and right channel signals to the front left and right speakers. • Select SMALL if you have small front speakers. The unit directs the low-frequency signals of the front channel to the speakers selected with “BASS OUT”. SWLx1 [SMLx2 • Select LRGx2 if you have 2 large surround back speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the surround back channel signal to the surround back speakers. • Select LRGx1 if you have a large surround back speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the surround back channel signal to the left surround back speaker. • Select SMLx2 if you have 2 small surround back speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround back channels are directed to the speakers selected with “BASS OUT”. • Select SMLx1 if you have a small surround back speaker. The low-frequency signals of the surround back channel are directed to the speakers selected with “BASS OUT”, and the rest of the frequency signals are directed to the left surround back speaker. • Select NONE if you do not have a surround back speaker. The unit directs all of the surround back channel signal to the surround left and right speakers. Note If you select LRGx1 or SMLx1, connect a speaker to the left SURROUND BACK speaker terminals. 49 ADVANCED OPERATION • Select LARGE if you have a large center speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the center channel signal to the center speaker. • Select SMALL if you have a small center speaker. The unit directs the low-frequency signals of the center channel to the speakers selected with “BASS OUT”. • Select NONE if you do not have a center speaker. The unit directs all of the center channel signal to the front left and right speakers. 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 50 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SET MENU Presence speakers PRESENCE SP Choices: NONE, YES PRESENCE SP NONE ■ Speaker level SP LEVEL Use these settings to manually balance the speaker levels between the front left or surround left speakers and each speaker selected in SPEAKER SET (page 49). MANUAL SETUP > SOUND MENU > SP LEVEL > B)SPEAKER LEVEL [YES . FR C SL + • Select YES if you have presence speakers. • Select NONE if you do not have presence speakers. LFE/bass out LFE/BASS OUT LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. The Lowfrequency signals can be directed to both front left and right speakers, and to the subwoofer (subwoofer can be used for both stereo reproduction and the sound field program). Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), FRNT, BOTH THX recommendation: SWFR LFE/BASS OUT [SWFR FRNT BOTH • Select SWFR if you connect a subwoofer. The unit directs all LFE and low-frequency signals to the subwoofer. • Select FRNT if you do not connect a subwoofer. The unit directs all low-frequency and LFE signals to the front speakers (even if you have previously set FRONT SP to SMALL). • Select BOTH to direct LFE signals to the subwoofer. Other low-frequency signals are directed to both the subwoofer and the other front channels in accordance with your other speaker settings. Cross over CROSS OVER Use this feature to select a cross-over (cut-off) frequency for all low-frequency signals. All frequencies below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer. Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz THX recommendation: 80Hz CROSS OVER FREQ;;;80Hz(THX) 50 Choices: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB • FR adjusts the balance of the front left and front right speakers. • C adjusts the balance of the front left and center speakers. • SL adjusts the balance of the front left and surround left speakers. • SBL* adjusts the balance of the surround left and surround back left speakers. • SBR* adjusts the balance of the surround left and surround back right speakers. • SR adjusts the balance of the surround left and surround right speakers. • SWFR adjusts the balance of the front left speaker and subwoofer. • PRES adjusts the balance of the front and presence speakers. * SB will be displayed if you selected only one surround back speaker in SURR B L/R SP (page 49). y Use a handheld SPL meter, hold at arms length and point upwards so that the meter is in the listening position. With the meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW, calibrate each speaker to 75 dB. 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 51 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SET MENU ■ Speaker distance SP DISTANCE Use this feature to manually input the distance of each speaker and adjust the delay applied to respective channel. Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position. However, this is not possible in most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all sound will arrive at the listening position at the same time. To access these parameters, select: MANUAL SETUP > SOUND MENU > SP DISTANCE > C)SP DISTANCE ■ Graphic equalizer GRAPHIC EQ Use this feature to select parametric (PEQ) or graphic equalizer (GEQ). To access these parameters, select: MANUAL SETUP > SOUND MENU > GRAPHIC EQ > Equalizer select EQ SELECT Choices: PEQ, GEQ • Select PEQ to use the equalizer adjusted in auto setup. • Select GEQ to adjust the built-in 7-band graphic equalizer so that the center, surround L/R and surround back L/R speakers tonal quality matches that of the left and right front speakers. . UNIT;;;;;;meters FRONTL;;;;2.30m FRONTR;;;;2.30m CENTER;;;;;2.00m D)GRAPHIC EQ p /p : Up/Down - / + : Adjust Unit UNIT Choices: meters (m), feet (ft) Initial setting: U.S.A. and Canada models: feet (ft) Other models: meters (m) • Select meters to input speaker distances in meters. • Select feet to input speaker distances in feet. Choices: –6 to +6 (dB) You can adjust 7 frequency bands: 63Hz, 160Hz, 400Hz, 1kHz, 2.5kHz, 6.3kHz, 16kHz ■ Low-frequency effect level LFE LEVEL Use to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries lowfrequency special effects which are only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. To access these parameters, select: MANUAL SETUP > SOUND MENU > LFE LEVEL E)LFE LEVEL ADVANCED OPERATION . SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB HEADPHONE;;;;0dB / : Up/Down -/+ : Adjust p p Speaker distances Choices: 0.3 to 24.00 m (1 to 80 ft) • FRONT L adjusts the distance of the front left speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • FRONT R adjusts the distance of the front right speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • CENTER adjusts the distance of the center speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • SURR L adjusts the distance of the surround left speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • SURR R adjusts the distance of the surround right speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • SB adjusts the distance of the surround back left speakers. Initial setting: 2.10 m (7.0 ft) • SWFR adjusts the distance of the subwoofer. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) . CHANNEL;;FRONT L + 63Hz 0dB 160Hz 0dB 400Hz 0dB 1kHz 0dB 2.5kHz 0dB 6.3kHz 0dB 16kHz 0dB Choices: –20 to 0 (dB) Speaker SPEAKER Select to adjust the speaker LFE level. Headphone HEADPHONE Select to adjust the headphone LFE level. Note Depending on the settings of LFE LEVEL, some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER jack. 51 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 52 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SET MENU ■ Dynamic range DYNAMIC RANGE Use to select the amount of dynamic range compression to be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is effective only when the unit is decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals. To access these parameters, select: MANUAL SETUP > SOUND MENU > DYNAMIC RANGE > ■ Low frequency test LOW FRQ. TEST Use this feature to adjust the output level of the subwoofer so it matches your other speakers. To access these parameters, select: MANUAL SETUP > SOUND MENU > LOW FRQ. TEST > G)LOW FRQ.TEST . TEST_TONE;;;;OFF OUTPUT;FRONT L/R FRQ;;;;;;;;;88Hz F)DYNAMIC RANGE . SP: MIN STD[MAX HP: MIN STD[MAX p p / : Up/Down -/+ : Adjust p p / : Up/Down -/+ : Adjust Choices: MIN (minimum), STD (standard), MAX (maximum) 1 Press j / i to set TEST TONE to ON, and adjust the volume with VOL –/+ so you can hear the tone. Do not turn up the volume too high. If no test tone is heard, turn down the volume, set this unit in the standby mode and make sure all the necessary connections are correct. • The tone generator produces a narrow-band noise centered on a specified frequency by the band pass filter besides a wide-band noise. 2 Press d to go to “OUTPUT” and press j / i to select the speaker you want to compare with the subwoofer. Choices: FRONT L/R, FRONT L, CENTER, FRONT R, SUR.R, SBR*, SBL*, SUR.L, SWFR, PRESENCE SP Select to adjust the speaker compression. HP Select to adjust the headphone compression. • Select MAX for feature films. • Select STD for general use. • Select MIN for listening to sources at low volume levels. * SB will be displayed if you selected only one surround back speaker in SURR B L/R SP (page 49). 3 Press d to go to “FRQ” and press j / i to select the frequency you want to use. Choices: 35 to 250 (Hz), Initial: 88 Hz 4 Adjust the volume of the subwoofer with the controls on the subwoofer so it matches that of the speaker you are comparing it to. y You can use the test tone not only for adjusting the subwoofer level, but also for checking the low-frequency characteristics of your listening room. Low-frequency sounds are especially affected by the listener’s position, speaker placement, subwoofer polarity and other conditions. 52 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 53 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SET MENU ■ Headphone tone control HP TONE CTRL ■ Presence/surround back channel select Use to adjust the amount of bass and treble output to your headphones. To access these parameters, select: MANUAL SETUP > SOUND MENU > HP TONE CTRL > PR/SBch SELECT You can select to prioritize either the surround back or presence speakers when playing sources that contain surround back channel signals using CINEMA DSP sound field programs. MANUAL SETUP > SOUND MENU > PR/SBch SELECT > H)HP TONE CTRL . BASS TRBL + 0dB / : Up/Down -/+ : Adjust J)PR/SBch SELECT PRch [SBch p p / : Exit -/+ : Select • Use BASS to adjust the headphone bass level. • Use TRBL to adjust the headphone treble level. Choices: –6 to +6 (dB), Initial: 0 dB ■ Audio set AUDIO SET Use to customize this units overall audio settings. To access these parameters, select: MANUAL SETUP > SOUND MENU > AUDIO SET I)AUDIO SET . AUDIO MUTE;;MUTE AUDIO DELAY;;0ms DIALG.LIFT;;;OFF Choices: PRch, SBch • Select SBch to use surround back speakers when a surround back channel signal is detected in a CINEMA DSP program. Presence channel signals will be output from front speakers. • Select PRch to use presence speakers even when surround back channel signals are input. The signals for the surround back channel will be output from surround speakers. p p / : Exit -/+ : Select Mute MUTE Use to adjust how much the mute function reduces the output volume. Choices: MUTE, –20 dB • Select MUTE to completely halt all output of sound. • Select –20 dB to reduce the current volume by 20 dB. ADVANCED OPERATION Delay DELAY Use to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the video image. This may be necessary when using certain LCD monitors or projectors. Choices: 0 to 240 (ms) Dialog lift DIALG.LIFT Use to turn on/off the DIALG.LIFT parameter (see page 76). This parameter adjusts the height of the front and center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.) by assigning some of the front and center channel elements to the presence speakers. Choices: ON, OFF • Select ON to turn on DIALG.LIFT effect. • Select OFF to turn off DIALG.LIFT effect. Note DIALG.LIFT appears only when PRESENCE is set to YES (see page 28). 53 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 54 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SET MENU Manual setup: INPUT 3 INPUT MENU OPTICAL IN for OPTICAL INPUT jacks (3), (4), (5) and (6) Choices: CD, PHONO, DVR/VCR 2, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, DTV, DVD, MD/TAPE, CD-R OPTICAL IN . A)I/OASSIGNMENT B)INPUTMODE C)INPUTRENAME D)EXT.INPUT . (3);;;;; CD ( CD ) (4);;;;; DVD (DVD ) (5);;;;; DTV (DTV ) p /p : Up/Down - / + : Select ■ Input/output assignment I/O ASSIGN You can assign jacks according to the component to be used if this unit’s initial settings do not correspond to your needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the respective jacks and effectively connect more components. Once the inputs have been reassigned, you can select the corresponding component by using INPUT on the front panel or the input selector buttons on the remote control. MANUAL SETUP > INPUT MENU > I/O ASSIGN > COAXIAL IN for COAXIAL INPUT jacks (7), (8) and (9) Choices: CD, PHONO, V-AUX, DVR/VCR 2, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, DTV, DVD, MD/TAPE, CD-R COAXIAL IN . (7);;;;; CD ( CD ) (8);;;;; DVD (DVD ) (9);;;;;DVR/VCR2 (DVR/VCR2) y The default settings are displayed with parentheses on the OSD. CMPNT-V IN for COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT jacks [A] and [B] Choices: DVD, V-AUX, DVR/VCR 2, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, DTV, CD-R CMPNT-V INPUT . [A];;;;; DVD ( DVD ) [B];;;;; DTV (DTV) OPTICAL OUT for OPTICAL OUTPUT jacks (1) and (2) Choices: MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, V-AUX, DVR/VCR 2, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, DTV, DVD Notes • You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same type of jack. • When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. ■ Input mode INPUT MODE Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on this unit (see page 34 for details about the input mode). MANUAL SETUP > INPUT MENU > INPUT MODE > B)INPUT MODE AUTO [LAST p p / : Exit -/+ : Select OPTICAL OUT . (1);;;;;MD/TAPE (MD/TAPE ) (2);;;;; CD-R (CD-R) Choices: AUTO, LAST • Select AUTO to allow this unit to automatically detect the type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode. • Select LAST to set this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for that source. Note Even if LAST is selected, the last setting for the EX/ES button will not be recalled. 54 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 55 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SET MENU ■ Input rename INPUT RENAME Use this feature to change the name of the inputs on the OSD and front panel display. MANUAL SETUP > INPUT MENU > INPUT RENAME > C)INPUT RENAME CD -> CD p p -/+ : Position / : Character Press an input selector button to select the input you want to change the name of. 2 Press j / i to place the _ (under-bar) under the space or the character you want to edit. 3 Press u / d to select the character you want to use and j / i to move to the next one. • You can use up to 8 characters for each input. • Press d to change the character in the following order, or press u to go in the reverse order: A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, #, *, +, etc. • Repeat steps 1 to 3 to rename each input. 4 Press i repeatedly to exit from INPUT RENAME. Use this feature to set the direction of the signals input into the center, subwoofer and surround channels when the source component is connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. If you are inputting 8-channel signals from an external decoder, use this feature to select jacks for the additional front signals. MANUAL SETUP > INPUT MENU > EXT.INPUT > D)EXT.INPUT . [6CH 8CH (FRNT/SB-> FRNT) CENTER ->CENTER SWFR -> SWFR SL/SR -> SL/SR ( ---> SB ) -/+ Select / : Up/Down p p 1 ■ External input EXT.INPUT 6ch/8ch This setting is used to select the number of channels input from an external decoder. Choices: 6ch, 8ch FRONT If you selected 8ch, you can select analog audio jacks to which front signals from an external decoder will be input. Choices: DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2, MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, V-AUX CENTER Use to select where the signals input to the CENTER jack will be output. Choices: CENTER, FRONT • Select CENTER to output the signals from the center speaker. • Select FRONT to output the signals from the front left and right speakers. SL/SR Use to select where the signals input to the SURROUND jacks will be output. Choices: SL/SR, FRONT • Select SL/SR to output the signals from the surround speakers. • Select FRONT to output the signals from the front left and right speakers. 55 ADVANCED OPERATION SWFR Use to select where the signals input to the SUBWOOFER jack will be output. Choices: SWFR, FRONT • Select SWFR to output the signals from the subwoofer. • Select FRONT to output the signals from the front left and right speakers. 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 56 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SET MENU Manual setup: OPTION 4 OPTION MENU . A)DISPLAYSET B)MEMORYGUARD C)PARAM.INI D)ZONESET p /p : Up/Down - / + : Select ■ Display set DISPLAY SET MANUAL SETUP > OPTION MENU > DISPLAY SET > A)DISPLAY SET . DIMMER;;;;;;;;;0 OSD SHIFT;;;;;;0 GRAY BACK;;;AUTO V CONV.;;;;;;;ON CMPNT OSD;;;;OFF p p / : Up/Down -/+ : Select Dimmer DIMMER Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display. Choices: –4 to 0 OSD shift OSD SHIFT Use to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. Choices: +5 (downward) to –5 (upward) • Press + to lower the position of the OSD. • Press – to raise the position of the OSD. Gray back GRAY BACK Selecting AUTO for the on-screen display setting displays a gray background when there’s no video signal input. Nothing is displayed if OFF is selected. Choices: AUTO, OFF Note If “GRAY BACK” is set to OFF, no information will be displayed on the screen when video signals are not being input. Video conversion V CONV. Use this feature to turn on/off the conversion of composite signals to both S-video and component signals. This allows you to output coverted video signals from the Svideo jack or the component video jack when no S-video or component signals are input. This feature also converts S-video signals to component signals when no component signals are input. Choices: ON, OFF • Select OFF not to convert any signals. • Select ON to convert composite signals to S-video and component signals, and to convert S-video signals to component signals. Notes • Converted video signals are only output to the MONITOR OUT jacks. When recording you must make the same type of video connections (composite or S-video) between each component. • When converting S-video signals from a VCR to component video signals, the picture quality may suffer depending on your VCR. Component OSD CMPNT OSD Use this feature to turn on/off OSD output to the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks when using the set menu, test tone or parameter functions. Choices: ON, OFF • Select ON to output the OSD signals from COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks. • Select OFF if you do not want to output the OSD signals from COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks. Note Set menu functions even when OFF is selected. ■ Memory guard MEMORY GUARD Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP program parameter values and other system settings. MANUAL SETUP > OPTION MENU > MEMORY GUARD > B)MEMORY GUARD [OFF ON p p / : Exit -/+ : Select Choices: ON, OFF Select ON to protect: • DSP program parameters • All SET MENU items • All speaker levels • The on-screen display (OSD) mode When MEMORY GUARD is set to ON, you cannot use the test tone or select any other SET MENU items. 56 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 57 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SET MENU ■ Parameter initialization PARAM. INI ■ Zone set ZONE SET Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each sound field program within a sound field program group. When you initialize a sound field program group, all of the parameter values within that group revert to their initial settings. MANUAL SETUP > OPTION MENU > PARAM. INI > Press the corresponding numeric button for the sound field program that you want to initialize. An asterisk (*) next to a program number means that the parameter values have been changed from their initial settings. Use to specify the location of speakers connected the SPEAKERS B terminals. MANUAL SETUP > OPTION MENU > ZONE SET > 1 2 3 *4 *5 6 7 8 9 *0 +10 Notes • You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter settings once you initialize a sound field program group. • You cannot separately initialize individual sound field programs. • You cannot initialize any program groups when MEMORY GUARD is set to ON. ■ Speaker impedance setting SP IMP.SET Use to select the impedance of your speakers. MANUAL SETUP > OPTION MENU > SP IMP.SET > / : Exit -/+ : Select p p C)PARAM. INI E)ZONE SET SP_B;;;;;;FRONT SP B Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals. Choices: FRONT, ZONE B • Select FRONT to turn on/off SPEAKERS A and B when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set in the main room. • Select ZONE B if the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another room. If SPEAKERS A is turned OFF and SPEAKERS B is turned ON, all the speakers including the subwoofer in the main room are muted and the unit outputs sound from SPEAKERS B only. Notes • If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack on the unit, the sound is output from both headphones and SPEAKERS B. • When a DSP program is selected, the unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode. D)SP IMP.SET Minimum 8ohms p p / : Exit -/+ : Select ADVANCED OPERATION Choices: 6ohms, 8ohms 57 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 58 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SET MENU ■ Zone 2 set ZONE2 SET (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only) MANUAL SETUP > OPTION MENU > ZONE2 SET > F)ZONE2 SET OUTPUT VOL;;VAR. ZONE2 AMP;;;OFF p p / : Up/Down -/+ : Select Output volume OUTPUT VOL Use to select how the volume control will operate with regard to the ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks. Choices: VAR., FIX • Select VAR. to adjust the ZONE 2 volume using the remote control. • Select FIX to fix the ZONE 2 OUTPUT volume level to a standard line level. Zone 2 amplifier ZONE2 AMP Use to select how the ZONE 2 speakers will be amplified. Choices: ON, OFF • Select OFF if you do not use Zone 2 speakers or if you connect your Zone 2 speakers through an external amplifiers connected to this unit’s ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks. • Select ON to use this unit’s internal amplifier if you connect your Zone 2 speakers directly to this unit’s PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals. 58 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 59 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other A/V components made by YAMAHA and other manufacturers. To control other components, you must set up remote control with the appropriate manufacturer codes. This remote control also has a learn feature which allows the remote to acquire functions from other remote controls equipped with an infrared remote control transmitter. Control area ■ Controlling this unit ■ Controlling other components The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit when the AMP mode is selected. Press AMP to select the AMP mode. The shaded areas below can be used to control other components. Each button has a different function depending on the selected components. Select the component you want to control by pressing an input selector button or SELECT k/n. The name of the selected component appears in the display window. TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD TRANSMIT DTV SELECT POWER POWER TV AV RE–NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM Input selector buttons switch the component control area. POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD AMP SELECT REC AUDIO DISC SKIP + VOL POWER POWER TV AV – REC MUTE DISC SKIP POWER TV LEVEL TITLE SET MENU + AMP POWER AV AUDIO + REC MENU VOL AUDIO TV VOL A/B/C/D/E TV INPUT DISC SKIP CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TEST ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL – DISPLAY EFFECT STEREO 1 ENTERTAIN 5 MOVIE 9 HALL 2 MUSIC 6 /DTS 0 JAZZ 3 TV THTR ROCK 4 MOVIE 7 8 NIGHT EX/ES +10 ENTER CHP/INDEX LEVEL TITLE – MUTE SET MENU + MENU TV VOL TV INPUT A/B/C/D/E LEVEL CH – + + A/B/C/D/E CH ON SCREENTV MUTE STEREO CH TV VOL – – DISPLAY 1 ENTERTAINMENT 5 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 + SELECT PRESET HALL MENU TV VOL PRESET TEST RETURN SET MENU TITLE CH TV MUTE SELECT TV INPUT PRESET ADVANCED OPERATION RETURN Component control area You can control up to 11 different components by setting appropriate manufacturer codes (see page 64). EFFECT PRESET TEST ROCKON SCREEN CHURCH JAZZ CLUB CONCERT TV VOL 2 RETURN 3 – 4 DISPLAY MOVIE MUSIC TV THEATER 1 VIDEOSTEREO THEATERHALL JAZZ 6 1 7 8 2 3 /DTS SUR.ENTERTAIN SELECT MUSICEX/ESTV THTR 10 5 11 +10 0 THX 9 12 6 ROCK 4 MOVIE 7 8 NIGHT EX/ES CHP/INDEX /DTS 0 +10 ENTER CHP/INDEX y You can set the remote so that the shaded areas always control this unit. This is useful, for example, if you always want to use the numeric buttons to select this unit’s sound fields instead of for controlling the selected component (DVD, CD, MD, etc.). To activate this mode, hold down AMP for at least 3 seconds so that “A:__” (i.e., “A:DVD”) appears in the display window. To cancel, repeat so that only the selected component (i.e., “DVD”) is displayed. 59 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 60 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES If you want to change a library (component category), press j / i. You can set a different type of component. Library choices: L:DVD, L:LD, L:CD, L:CDR, L:MD, L:TAP (tape), L:TUN, L:AMP*, L:TV, L:CAB (cable), L:DBS, L:SAT, L:VCR Setting manufacturer codes You can control other components by setting the appropriate manufacturer codes. Codes can be set up for each input area. * The amplifier Library (L:AMP) code is preset to “YPC” to operate this unit. However, you can switch between the following two codes if necessary. • The initial setting for “Amplifier library” is “YPC”. The following table shows the factory preset component (Library: component category) and the manufacturer code for each area. Input area Component category (Library) Manufacturer PHONO TV – TUNER TUNER YAMAHA-1 CD CD YAMAHA-1 V-AUX VCR – CBL/SAT CABLE – MD/TAPE MD YAMAHA-1 CD-R CD-R YAMAHA YPC To operate this unit. ZONE (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only) To operate ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 features. DTV TV – VCR 1 VCR – DVR/VCR2 VCR – 3 Press u / d to select the name of your component’s manufacturer. You will find the names of most worldwide audiovideo manufacturers in alphabetical order in the display window. + TV VOL CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET DVD DVD YAMAHA-1 CH + PRESET TV VOL – Note You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even if a YAMAHA manufacturer code is initially set as listed above. In this case, try to set other YAMAHA manufacturer code(s). 1 Press an input selector button to select the source component you want to set up. PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R 4 Press one of the buttons shaded below to see if you can control your component. If you can, the manufacturer code is correct. POWER POWER TV AV AMP REC AUDIO DISC SKIP DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 + VOL DVD – LEVEL TITLE SET MENU + MUTE MENU TV VOL 2 Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “SETUP” and the selected component name appear alternately in the display window. LEARN Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3 seconds, otherwise the learning process will start. y Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds. Otherwise, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press LEARN again. 60 TV INPUT A/B/C/D/E y • If the manufacturer of your component has more than one codes, try each of them until you find the correct one. • If you continuously want to set up another code for another component, press TV MUTE/SELECT and repeat steps 1, 3 and 4. 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 61 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 5 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup mode. 2 LEARN RE–NAME CLEAR LEARN INPUT MODE MULTI CH IN TRANSMIT CD SLEEP DVD CD-R STANDBY TUNER MD/TAPE SYSTEM DVR/VCR2 POWER PHONO VCR 1 CBL/SAT AMP SELECT DTV AV POWER V-AUX TV • The supplied remote control does not contain all possible manufacturer codes for commercially available AV components (including YAMAHA AV components). If operation is not possible with any of the manufacturer codes, program the new remote control function with the Learn feature (see below) or use the remote control supplied with the component. • If you have already programmed a remote control function for a button, the function by learning programming takes priority over the setup manufacturer code’s function. • “ERROR” appears in the display window when press any buttons other than indicated in each step, or when you press more than one button at once. POWER Notes Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm apart from the other remote control on a flat surface so that their infrared transmitters are aimed at each other. 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 inches) 3 Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar object. Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for more than three seconds, the remote enters the manufacturer code setting mode. Programming codes from other remote controls LEARN If you want to program functions not included in the basic operations covered by the manufacturer code, or an appropriate manufacturer code is not available, do the following. You can program any of the buttons available in the component control area (see page 59). The buttons can be programmed independently for each component. Flashes alternately y Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds. Otherwise, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press LEARN again. Note This remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn most of its functions. However, you may not be able to program some special signals or extremely long transmissions. (Refer to the operation instructions for the other remote control.) Press the button at which you want to program the new function. “LEARN” is displayed. MULTI CH IN INPUT MODE ADVANCED OPERATION CD SLEEP LEARN STANDBY DVD CD-R CLEAR TUNER MD/TAPE RE–NAME POWER DVR/VCR2 TRANSMIT PHONO VCR 1 CBL/SAT SYSTEM DTV DVD V-AUX CD-R DVR/VCR2 AMP MD/TAPE VCR 1 SELECT CBL/SAT POWER DTV POWER V-AUX + MULTI CH IN AV AUDIO CD – TUNER VOL PHONO TV Press an input selector button to select a source component. REC DISC SKIP 1 4 61 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 62 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 5 Press and hold the button you want to program on the other remote control until “OK” appears in the display window. Changing source names in the display window MULTI CH IN INPUT MODE LEARN CD SLEEP CLEAR STANDBY DVD CD-R RE–NAME TUNER MD/TAPE TRANSMIT POWER DVR/VCR2 SYSTEM PHONO VCR 1 CBL/SAT AMP SELECT DTV AV POWER V-AUX TV POWER You can change the name that appears in the display window on the remote control if you want to use the different name than the factory preset. This is useful when you have set the input selector to control a different component. 1 Notes • “NG” appears in the display window if programming was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 5. • This remote control can learn approximately 120 functions. However depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may appear in the display before you program 120 functions. In this case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room for further learning. 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to program additional functions. 7 Press LEARN again to exit from the learning mode. 2 3 Press an input selector button to select the source component you want to rename. The selected component name appears in the display window. PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX DTV CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Press RE-NAME using a ballpoint pen or similar object. RE-NAME Press u / d to select and enter a character. Pressing d changes the character as follows: A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, space, -(hyphen), and /(slash). (Pressing u changes the characters in reverse order.) + TV VOL LEARN CH – CH TV MUTE SELECT PRESET + PRESET TV VOL – Notes • Learning may not be possible in the following cases: – When the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other components are weak. – When the distance between the two remote controls is too great or too small. – When the remote control infrared windows are not facing at the appropriate angle. – When the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight. – When the function to be programmed is continuous or uncommon. • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press more than one button at the same time. 4 Press j / i to move the cursor to the next position. + TV VOL CH – CH + PRESET TV VOL – y If you want to continue setting up names for other components, press TV MUTE/SELECT and repeat steps 1, 3 and 4. 5 Press RE-NAME again to exit from the renaming mode. RE-NAME 62 TV MUTE SELECT PRESET 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 63 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Clearing function sets Clearing individual functions You can clear all changes made in each function set, such as learned functions, renamed source names and setup manufacturer codes. ■ Clearing a learned function 1 1 Press CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. You can clear the function learned in a certain programmed button in each area. CLEAR y Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds. Other wise, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press CLEAR again. 2 PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Press u / d to select the clear mode. L:DVD (L: name of a component) L:AMP L:ALL RNAME FCTRY 3 Press an input selector button to select the source component containing the function you want to clear. The selected component name appears in the display window. 2 Clears all learned functions in the respective component control area. Press an input selector button to select the component. Clears all learned functions for this unit’s control area. Clears all learned functions. Clears all renamed source names. Clears all remote functions and returns the remote to the factory settings. LEARN Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3 seconds. “C:OK” appears in the display window. CLEAR Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “LEARN” and the selected component name appear alternately in the display window. y Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds. Otherwise the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press LEARN again. 3 Note TRANSMIT “C:NG” appears in the display window if the operation is unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 2. 4 Press CLEAR to exit from the clearing mode. Once you have cleared a learned function for a button, the button reverts to the factory setting. “ERROR” appears in the display window under the following circumstances: – When a button other than the cursor is pressed. – When more than one button is pressed at once. STANDBY CLEAR LEARN SLEEP INPUT MODE PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD When you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have set manufacturer codes). CLEAR Note RE–NAME SYSTEM POWER 4 Repeat step 3 to clear other learned functions. 5 Press LEARN again to exit. 63 ADVANCED OPERATION Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen or similar object, then press the button you want to clear for about 3 seconds. “C:OK” appears in the display window. 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 64 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Controlling each component Once you set the appropriate manufacturer codes, you can use this remote to control your other components. Note that some buttons may not correctly operate the selected component. Use the input selector buttons to select the component you want to operate. The remote control automatically switches to the appropriate control mode for that component. y • To control a component without changing the receiver’s input mode, use SELECT k/n to select the component. • TV POWER, TV VOL –/+, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE will operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the DTV areas. If a component other than TV is set up in the DTV area, you can control your TV by setting up your TV in the PHONO area. If your TV is set up in both the DTV and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV area. ■ Operating a DVD player (DVD area) TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR ■ Operating a VCR or a DVD recorder (VCR 1, DVR/VCR2 and V-AUX areas) LEARN TRANSMIT SLEEP INPUT MODE POWER SYSTEM POWER RE–NAME CLEAR STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD SELECT TV POWER Pause DISC SKIP (DVD changer) Skip backward Search backward Stop TITLE TV operation POWER POWER TV AV – LEVEL SET MENU + MUTE – TV MUTE SELECT POWER TV AV Search forward + PRESET STRAIGHT Menu cursor/ SELECT DISPLAY STEREO HALL JAZZ ROCK 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 NIGHT EX/ES 9 /DTS 0 +10 ENTER CHP/INDEX AMP AV POWER REC AUDIO + VOL Play Search backward – LEVEL SET MENU + MUTE Stop Search forward MENU TV VOL TV INPUT A/B/C/D/E TV operation CH – CH +/– (channel) TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TEST ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN – DISPLAY STEREO HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 NIGHT EX/ES EFFECT THX 64 Skip forward Play MENU CH ON SCREEN – POWER DISC SKIP TV VOL RETURN Pause Record TITLE A/B/C/D/E TV INPUT TV POWER MENU TV VOL CH AV POWER + VOL TITLE SELECT AUDIO AUDIO TEST Numeric buttons AMP REC DISC SKIP PRESET RETURN LEARN SYSTEM STANDBY EFFECT DISPLAY Numeric buttons Title/index THX 9 /DTS 0 +10 ROCK ENTER CHP/INDEX ENTER 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 65 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Operating a digital TV (DTV area) or a cable/satellite TV (CBL/SAT area) ■ Operating an LD player LEARN TRANSMIT SYSTEM SYSTEM STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE CD MULTI CH IN TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR RE–NAME CLEAR POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN PHONO TUNER V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD SELECT SELECT TV POWER * POWER POWER TV AV AMP AUDIO TITLE SET MENU + POWER TV AV DISC SKIP Search backward MUTE – LEVEL TV VOL –/+ A/B/C/D/E CH +/– CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET TV operation CH + ON SCREEN CH – – TV MUTE SELECT RETURN CH + ON SCREEN – STEREO Numeric buttons HALL JAZZ 2 3 4 MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 THX 9 6 /DTS 0 DISPLAY EFFECT STEREO ROCK 1 STRAIGHT DISPLAY EFFECT ENTERTAIN Search forward Stop MENU TV VOL DISPLAY Play Skip forward MUTE PRESET TEST STRAIGHT AV POWER Sound A/B/C/D/E PRESET TV VOL RETURN + TV INPUT PRESET TEST SET MENU TV VOL TV VOL TV INPUT + VOL TITLE MENU AMP REC Skip backward – LEVEL POWER AUDIO + VOL TV operation TV MUTE TV POWER Pause REC DISC SKIP TV INPUT LEARN POWER Numeric buttons 4 MOVIE 7 8 5 EX/ES THX ENTER * AV POWER (DTV only), REC, e, p, s, and w/ f will operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR 1 if the manufacturer code for your VCR is set up in the VCR 1. ROCK 3 TV THTR +10 ENTER/12 JAZZ 2 MUSIC NIGHT CHP/INDEX HALL 1 ENTERTAIN 9 6 /DTS 0 7 8 NIGHT EX/ES +10 ENTER Chapter/time CHP/INDEX Set the manufacture code for your LD player following the setting procedure described on page 60 because DTV is factory-set to operate TVs. ADVANCED OPERATION 65 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 66 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Operating a CD player (CD area) ■ Operating a CD recorder (CD-R area) or an MD recorder (MD/TAPE area) LEARN TRANSMIT SYSTEM SYSTEM STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE CD MULTI CH IN TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR RE–NAME CLEAR POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN PHONO TUNER V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD SELECT SELECT TV POWER DISC SKIP (CD changer) POWER POWER TV AV AMP AUDIO + VOL – LEVEL TITLE SET MENU + CH – PRESET – + Numeric buttons HALL 2 3 4 MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 9 6 /DTS 0 7 8 NIGHT EX/ES +10 ENTER CHP/INDEX 66 AUDIO + VOL – LEVEL CH – AV POWER Pause REC DISC SKIP SET MENU + TV MUTE SELECT Skip forward Play Search forward MUTE MENU Stop A/B/C/D/E PRESET Numeric buttons CH + PRESET ON SCREEN STRAIGHT DISPLAY TV VOL RETURN – DISPLAY EFFECT STEREO HALL JAZZ ROCK 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 Index AMP TV VOL Clear (CD-R only) ROCK 1 ENTERTAIN THX AV TEST DISPLAY JAZZ TV TV INPUT DISPLAY STRAIGHT EFFECT STEREO Search backward TV operation TV VOL RETURN POWER TITLE CH ON SCREEN POWER Skip backward Stop PRESET TEST Search forward TV POWER Record (MD only) MENU A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE SELECT Play Skip forward MUTE TV VOL TV INPUT TV operation AV POWER Pause REC DISC SKIP Skip backward Search backward LEARN POWER THX 9 6 /DTS 0 7 8 NIGHT EX/ES +10 ENTER CHP/INDEX Index (CD-R only) 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 67 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Operating a tape deck (MD/TAPE area) TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR ■ Operating a tuner (TUNER area) TRANSMIT LEARN RE–NAME CLEAR POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD SELECT SELECT TV POWER Pause Record POWER POWER TV AV AMP AV POWER TV POWER AUDIO DISC SKIP + VOL – Search backward LEVEL TITLE SET MENU + – TV AV TV MUTE SELECT Play Direction B – LEVEL TITLE ON SCREEN MUTE Preset group A/B/C/D/E PRESET + MENU CH – A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TEST STRAIGHT ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL TV VOL – + TV INPUT PRESET – + SET MENU TV VOL Stop CH + VOL Search forward PRESET TEST DISPLAY RETURN – DISPLAY EFFECT EFFECT Numeric buttons AMP AV POWER AUDIO MUTE A/B/C/D/E PRESET RETURN POWER DISC SKIP MENU TV VOL TV INPUT CH POWER REC REC Direction A TV operation LEARN SYSTEM SYSTEM STEREO HALL JAZZ ROCK STEREO HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 THX 9 6 /DTS 0 7 8 NIGHT EX/ES +10 ENTER Preset number 1-8 5 THX Index CHP/INDEX 9 6 /DTS 0 ROCK 7 8 NIGHT EX/ES +10 ENTER CHP/INDEX Set the manufacture code for your tape deck following the setting procedure described on page 60 because MD/ TAPE is factory-set to operate MD decks. ADVANCED OPERATION 67 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 68 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., CANADA AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY) ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., CANADA AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY) This unit allows you to configure a multi-room audio system. The Zone 2 and Zone 3 features enable you to set this unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main room, second room (Zone 2) and third room (Zone 3). You can control this unit from the second room using the supplied remote control. Only analog signals are sent to the second and third rooms. Any source you want to listen to in the second or third room must be connected using the analog (AUDIO L/R) input jacks on this unit. Zone 2/Zone 3 connections You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-room functions of this unit: • An infrared signal receiver in the second and/or third room. • An infrared emitter in the main room. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in the second and/or third room to the main room (to a CD player or LD player, for example). • An amplifier and speakers for the second and/or third room. y OUT IN OUT REMOTE CONTROL OUT IN This unit • Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-room installation, we recommend that you consult with the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center for the Zone 2/Zone 3 connections which will best meet your requirements. • Some YAMAHA models are able to connect directly to the REMOTE CONTROL OUT jack of this unit. If you own these products, you may not need to use an infrared emitter. Up to 6 YAMAHA components can be connected as shown. ■ System configuration and connections example Using external amplifiers To use an external amplifier in Zone 2, select OFF in ZONE2 AMP. ZONE 2 AUDIO OUT Amplifier DVD player (or other component) This unit ZONE 3 AUDIO OUT Amplifier Remote control DVD INPUT Infrared emitter Main room REMOTE CONTROL OUT Infrared signal receiver Second room Third room ZONE 2 REMOTE IN Notes • When not using the main room, turn down the volume of this unit in the main room. Adjust the ZONE 2/ZONE 3 volume by using the amplifier in the second/third room. When using the remote control to adjust the ZONE 2 volume, set the volume of the amplifier in the second room to the maximum level you will use, and select VAR. in ZONE 2 SET OUTPUT VOL (page 58). • To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2/Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS. 68 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 69 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., CANADA AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY) Using this unit’s internal amplifier To use this unit’s internal amplifier, select ON in ZONE2 AMP. R L + – PRESENCE/ ZONE 2 Second room This unit Remote controlling Zone 2/Zone 3 The supplied remote control can be used to control Zone 2/Zone 3. You can even select the input source and control components located in the main room directly from the second room regardless of the listening condition in the main room. ■ To enable Zone mode on the remote control You will be able to switch the remote control mode from one room to another, and use STANDBY, SYSTEM POWER, MUTE and VOL –/+ to control the selected room. 1 Repeat steps 1 and 2 of the procedure in “Setting manufacturer codes” on page 60. 2 Press j / i to select “L:AMP”. ■ To control Zone 2/Zone 3 1 Press SELECT k repeatedly to display “ZONE2” or “ZONE3” in the display window. or SELECT SELECT 2 Press SYSTEM POWER to turn Zone 2 or Zone 3 power on. 3 Press an input selector button to select the input source you want to listen to in the second/third room. The display window shows “2: name of selected input” if the remote control is in the Zone 2 mode. + PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX DTV CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD TV VOL – TV MUTE SELECT ADVANCED OPERATION CH PRESET CH + Note PRESET TV VOL – 3 Signals input to V-AUX and PHONO jacks cannot be sent to Zone 2/Zone 3. Press u / d to select “ZONE”. + TV VOL CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TV VOL – 4 Press LEARN to complete the Zone setup. The remote control will be able to operate this unit, Zone 2 or Zone 3. LEARN 69 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 70 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., CANADA AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY) ■ Turning this unit to either on or standby 4 You can control Zone 2 or Zone 3 by using the input selector, STANDBY, SYSTEM POWER, MUTE and VOL –/+ buttons. REC TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR AUDIO LEARN DISC SKIP + * SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE VOL – PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD LEVEL TITLE SET MENU + MUTE MENU TV VOL A/B/C/D/E TV INPUT CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TEST ON SCREEN STRAIGHT SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY work differently depending on the selected mode that appears on the display window. • When normal, Zone2 or Zone 3 mode is selected, you can turn the main unit, Zone 2 or Zone 3 to on/standby individually. • When system mode is selected, or when YPC is selected as the amplifier library (L:AMP) code, you can turn the main unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 to on/ standby all together simultaneously. TV VOL RETURN – DISPLAY EFFECT * VOL –/+ can be used only when VAR. is selected in ZONE2 SET OUTPUT VOL (page 58). 5 Press SELECT k/n to exit from the Zone 2/ Zone 3 mode. LCD display SYSTEM POWER/ STANDBY Normal mode* name of component turns the main unit on/standby Zone 2 mode “ZONE2” or “2:name of component” turns Zone 2 to on/ standby Zone 3 mode “ZONE3” or “3:name of component” turns Zone 3 to on/ standby System mode “SYSTM” turns everything (the main unit, Zone 2, Zone 3) on/standby Note “ZONE2” or “ZONE3” will appear in the display window only when k is pressed, and SYSTM only when n is pressed. * “MAIN” appears for a few seconds when SYSTEM POWER or STANDBY is pressed. ■ Special considerations for DTS software The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. If you attempt to send the DTS signal to the second/third room you will only hear digital noise (that may damage your speakers). Thus, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made when playing DTS encoded discs. For LDs or DVDs encoded with DTS Only 2 channel analog audio signals may be sent to the second/third room. • for LDs: Set your LD player’s left and right outputs to the analog soundtrack. • for DVDs: Use the disc menu to set the DVD player’s mixed 2-channel left and right audio outputs to the PCM or Dolby Digital soundtrack. For CDs encoded in DTS To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2/ Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS. 70 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 71 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS What is a sound field What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound “live”, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting. Changing parameter settings You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial settings, you can change some of the parameters to better suit the input source or your listening room. TV TRANSMIT ■ Elements of a sound field RE–NAME CLEAR AV REC LEARN AUDIO DISC SKIP SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD + VOL In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field: MUTE MENU TV VOL A/B/C/D/E CH TV MUTE SELECT – PRESET POWER TV 1 POWER + ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL 5 AMP CH PRESET TEST RETURN – DISPLAY STEREO HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 NIGHT EX/ES +10 ENTER 4 2 EFFECT AV REC /DTS THX 9 0 ROCK 3 CHP/INDEX 1 Press AMP to select the AMP mode. 2 Turn on the video monitor and press ON SCREEN repeatedly to select the full display mode. 3 AMP ON SCREEN DISPLAY Select the sound field program you want to adjust. ON SCREEN STEREO HALL If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field processor. + TITLE SELECT Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberation taken together help us to determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound fields. SET MENU TV INPUT Early reflections Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms – 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one surface only — for example, from the ceiling or a wall. Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound. Reverberations These are caused by reflections from more than one surface — walls, ceiling, the back of the room — so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. – LEVEL 1 DISPLAY 2 JAZZ ROCK 3 4 MOVIE ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR 5 6 7 8 NIGHT EX/ES THX 9 /DTS 0 +10 ENTER CHP/INDEX Program No. Program name ADDITIONAL INFORMATION P05 ROCK CONCERT Cursor DSP LEVEL;;;;0dB > INIT.DLY;;;;15ms ROOM SIZE;;;;1.0 LIVENESS;;;;;;;5 REV.TIME;;;;1.6s REV.DELAY;;120ms Parameters Parameter values 71 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 72 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS 4 Press u / d to select the parameters. + TV VOL CH – CH TV MUTE SELECT PRESET + PRESET TV VOL – 5 6 Press j / i to change the parameter value. When you set a parameter to a value other than the factory preset value, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the parameter name on the video monitor. + TV VOL CH – CH TV MUTE SELECT PRESET + PRESET TV VOL – Repeat steps 3 to 5 above as necessary to change other program parameters. Notes • The available parameters may be displayed on more than one OSD page for some of the programs. To scroll through pages, press u / d. • You cannot change parameter values when MEMORY GUARD is set to “ON”. If you want to change the parameter values, set MEMORY GUARD to “OFF” (see page 56). Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the parameter values will return to the factory settings. If this happens, edit the parameter value again. ■ Resetting parameters to the factory preset values To reset a certain parameter Select the parameter you want to reset, then press –/+ repeatedly until the asterisk mark (*) next to the parameter name disappears from the video monitor. To reset all parameters Use PARAM.INI (see page 57). 72 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 73 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program. ■ DSP LEVEL Function: Description: Control range: This parameter adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range. Depending on the acoustics of you listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect level relative to the level of the direct sound. –6 dB – +3 dB ■ INIT. DLY/P. INT. DLY (Initial delay) Function: Description: Control range: This parameter changes the apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The larger the value, the farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set to a large value. 1 – 99 msec Source Sound Level Level Level Early Reflections Time Time Time INIT. DLY INIT. DLY INIT. DLY Sound Source Reflection Face Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms ■ ROOM SIZE/P. ROOM SIZE (Room size) Function: Description: Control range: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room. 0.1 – 2.0 Time Level Level Time Early Reflections ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Level Source Sound Time Sound Source Small value = 0.1 Large value = 2.0 73 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 74 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ LIVENESS Function: Description: Control range: This parameter adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. The LIVENESS parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the room. 0 – 10 Source Sound Time Small Reflected Sound Small value = 0 Level Dead Level Level Live Time Time Large Reflected Sound Large value = 10 ■ S. INIT. DLY (Surround initial delay) Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side of the sound field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two surround channels are used. Control Range: 1 – 49 msec ■ S. ROOM SIZE (Surround room size) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. Control Range: 0.1 – 2.0 ■ S. LIVENESS (Surround liveness) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field. Control Range: 0 – 10 ■ SB INIT. DLY (Surround back initial delay) Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the surround back sound field. Control Range: 1 – 49 msec ■ SB ROOM SIZE (Surround back room size) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround back sound field. Control Range: 0.1 – 2.0 ■ SB LIVENESS (Surround back liveness) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual wall in the surround back sound field. Control Range: 0 – 10 74 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 75 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ REV.TIME (Reverberation time) Function: This parameter adjusts the amount of time it takes for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB (at 1 kHz). This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range. Description: Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening room environments, and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments. Control Range: 1.0 – 5.0 sec Source Sound Reverberation Reverberation Early Reflections 60 dB 60 dB REV.TIME Sound Source REV.TIME 60 dB REV.TIME Long Reverberation Short Reverberation Large value = 5.0 s Small value = 1.0 s ■ REV.DELAY (Reverberation delay) This parameter adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the reverberation sound. Description: The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel like you are in a larger acoustic environment. Control Range: 0 – 250 msec Level Function: Source Sound (dB) 60 dB Reverberation Time REV.DELAY REV.TIME ■ REV. LEVEL (Reverberation level) ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Function: This parameter adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. Description: The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes. Control Range: 0 – 100% Level Source Sound REV. LEVEL Time 75 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 76 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ DIALG.LIFT (Dialog lift) Function: Description: Choices: This parameter adjusts the height of the front and center channel sounds by assigning some of the front and center channel elements to the presence speakers. The larger the parameter, the higher the position of the front and center channel sound. 0/1/2/3/4/5, initial setting is 3. For 7ch Stereo Function: These parameter adjusts the volume level for each channel in 7-channel stereo mode. Control Range: 0 – 100% ■ CT LEVEL (Center level) ■ SL LEVEL (Surround left level) ■ SR LEVEL (Surround right level) ■ SB LEVEL (Surround back level) ■ PR LEVEL (Presence level) For PRO LOGIC IIx Music and PRO LOGIC II Music ■ PANORAMA Function: Choices: Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for wraparound effect. OFF/ON, initial setting is OFF. ■ DIMENSION Function: Control range: Gradually adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear. –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard). ■ CT WIDTH (Center width) Function: Control range: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. A larger value adjusts the center image towards the front left and right speakers. 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only from front left and right speakers), initial setting is 3. For PRO LOGIC IIx Music, Movie and Game ■ PLII/PLIIx (Pro Logic II/Pro Logic IIx) Function: Choices: Switches the type of Pro Logic decoding to be used. PLII decoding creates 5.1-channel sound from 2channel sources. PLIIx decoding creates 6.1/7.1-channel sound from 2-channel sources. PLII, PLIIx For DTS Neo:6 Music ■ C. IMAGE (Center image) Function: Control range: This parameter adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. 0 – 0.5 For THX Cinema ■ DEC (2ch Decoder Select) Function: Choices: 76 Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using THX Cinema. PRO LOGIC / PLII Movie / Neo:6 Cinema 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 77 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, and contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. ■ General Problem This unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, or enters in the standby mode soon after the power has been turned on. On screen display does not appear. No sound Remedy Refer to page The power cord is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Connect the power cord firmly. — The impedance setting is incorrect. Set the impedance to match your speakers. 23 The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity). Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, then use it normally. — The setting for the on-screen display is set to “DISPLAY OFF”. Select the full display or short display mode. 44 GRAY BACK in the SET MENU is set to OFF, and no video signal is currently being received. Set GRAY BACK to AUTO to always show the OSD. 56 Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. INPUT MODE is set to DTS or ANALOG. Select AUTO. 34 No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT, MULTI CH INPUT or the input selector buttons. 30 Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 12 The front speakers to be used have not been selected properly. Select the front speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or B. 30 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. 31 If you are playing an LD source, the player may not output digital signals if the LD source was not digitally recorded. Set the INPUT MODE to ANALOG. 34 The INPUT MODE is set to ANALOG while playing a source encoded with a DTS signal. Set the INPUT MODE to AUTO or DTS. 34 The signals this unit cannot reproduce are being received from a source component e.g.: a CD-ROM. Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce. — The output and input for the picture are connected to different types of video jacks. Turn on the video conversion function. 56 12—14 16—19 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION No picture Cause 77 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 78 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM TROUBLESHOOTING Problem The sound suddenly goes off. Cause Remedy Refer to page Check that the impedance selector setting is correct. 23 Check that the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. — The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power, and play the source again. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE to cancel a mute. 31 Only the speaker on one side can be heard. Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 12 Incorrect balance settings in SET MENU. Adjust the SP LEVEL settings. 50 Only the center speaker outputs substantial sound. When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, and the front and surround speakers output effect sounds. No sound from the effect speakers. The sound field programs are turned off. Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to turn them on. 34 A Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS decoding DSP program is being used with material not encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS. Try another sound field program. 32 The output level of the center speaker is set to minimum. Raise the level of the center speaker. 50 “CENTER SP” in the SET MENU is set to NONE. Select the appropriate mode for your center speaker. 49 One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (except for 7ch Stereo) has been selected. Try another sound field program. 32 The output level of the surround speakers is set to minimum. Raise the output level of the surround speakers. 50 “SURR. LR SP” in the SET MENU is set to NONE. Select the appropriate speaker mode for the surround L/R speakers. 49 A monaural source is being played with STRAIGHT. Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to turn on the sound fields. Then try another sound field program. — Presence speakers are selected. Select surround back speakers in PR/SBch SELECT. 53 “SURR. LR SP” in the SET MENU is set to NONE. If the speaker mode for the surround L/R speakers is set to NONE, the speaker mode for the surround back speaker is automatically set to NONE. Select the appropriate speaker mode for the surround L/R speaker mode. 49 “SURR B L/R SP” in the SET MENU is set to NONE. Select LRG or SML. 49 “LFE/BASS OUT” in the SET MENU is set to FRONT when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Select SWFR or BOTH. 50 “LFE/BASS OUT” in the SET MENU is set to SWFR or FRONT when a 2-channel source is being played. Select BOTH. 50 No sound from the center speaker. No sound from the surround speakers. No sound from the surround back speakers. No sound from the subwoofer. The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. The source does not contain low bass signals. 78 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 79 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause Remedy Refer to page Dolby Digital or DTS sources cannot be played. (Dolby Digital or DTS indicator on the front panel display does not light up.) The connected component is not set to output Dolby Digital or DTS digital signals. Make an appropriate setting following the operations instructions for your component. — INPUT MODE is set to ANALOG. Set INPUT MODE to AUTO or DTS. 34 A “humming” sound can be heard. Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. — No connection from the turntable to the GND terminal. Connect the grounding cord of your turnable to the GND terminal of this unit. 19 The volume level is low while playing a record. The record is being played on a turntable with an MC cartridge. The turntable should be connected to this unit through an MC-head amplifier. 19 The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power to the component. — The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect with a recording component. A source cannot be recorded by a digital recording component connected to this DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. The source component is not connected to this unit’s DIGITAL INPUT jacks. A source cannot be recorded by an analog component connected to the AUDIO OUT jacks. Connect the source component to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks. 16—19 The source component is not connected to this unit’s analog AUDIO IN jacks. Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO IN jacks. 16—19 The sound field parameters and some other settings on this unit cannot be changed. “MEMORY GUARD” in the SET MENU is set to ON. Select OFF. 56 This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — “CHECK SP WIRES” appears on the front panel display. Speaker cables are short circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. 12 Some components cannot record the Dolby Digital or DTS sources. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 79 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 80 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM TROUBLESHOOTING Remedy Refer to page Problem Cause There is noise interference from digital or highfrequency equipment, or this unit. This unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment. Move this unit further away from such equipment. — The picture is disturbed. The video source uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent dubbing. Playing back video software that has an anti-copy signal or video signals with a lot of noise may produce unstable images. — There is noise when the OSD is displayed. The OSD may be disturbed when displaying OSD through component video connections. Select OFF in CMPNT OSD. 56 This unit suddenly turns into the standby mode. The internal temperature becomes too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait until this unit cools down and then turn it back on. — ■ Tuner Problem FM stereo reception is noisy. FM AM 80 Cause The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Remedy Refer to page Check the antenna connections. Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. 21 Use the manual tuning method. 36 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multipath interference. — The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The station is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. 21 Use the manual tuning method. 36 Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned in. This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Preset the stations again. 37 The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for best reception. — Use the manual tuning method. 36 There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. — There are buzzing and whining noises (especially in the evening). A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV. — 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 81 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work nor function properly. The remote control does not “learn” new functions. Cause Remedy Refer to page Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 feet) and no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel. 7 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 3 The manufacture code has not correctly set. Set the manufacturer code correctly. 60 Try to set the other codes of the same manufacturer. 60 Even if the manufacturer code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. Program the necessary functions independently into the programmable buttons using the Learn feature. 61 The batteries of this remote control and/or the other remote control are too weak. Replace the batteries. 3 The distance between the two remote controls is too much or too little. Place the remote controls at the proper distance. 61 The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not compatible with this remote control. Learning is not possible. — Memory capacity is full. Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for the new functions. 63 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 81 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 82 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM GLOSSARY GLOSSARY ■ Dolby Surround ■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete 7.1-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There is a Music mode for music, a Movie mode for movies and a Game mode for games. ■ Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (left, center, and right), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system has a total of 5.1 channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with previously unheard of excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the 2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving sound especially with scenes with "flyover" and "fly-around" effects. ■ Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround software. This new technology enables a discrete 5channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels (instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology). The Music and Game modes are also available for 2-channel sources in addition to the movie mode. 82 ■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital Surround DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, a left, right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1 channels). The unit incorporates DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel to existing 5.1-channel format. ■ Neo:6 Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6 channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. Two modes are available; “Music mode” for playing music sources and “Cinema mode” for movies. ■ LFE 0.1 channel This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in a Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1 channel systems. 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 83 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM GLOSSARY ■ THX Cinema processing ■ THX Select THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies established by the world-renowned film production company, Lucasfilm Ltd. THX grew from George Lucas’ personal desire to make your experience of the film soundtrack, in both movie theatres and in your home theatre, as faithful as possible to what the director intended. Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theatres called dubbing stages and are designed to be played back in movie theatres with similar equipment and conditions. This same soundtrack is then transferred directly onto Laserdisc, VHS tape, DVD, etc., and is not changed for playback in a small home theatre environment. THX engineers developed patented technologies to accurately translate the sound from the movie theatre environment into the home, correcting the tonal and spatial errors that occur. On this product, when the THX indicator is on, THX features are automatically added in Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX Surround EX). Before any home theatre component can be THX Select certified, it must incorporate all the features above and also pass a rigorous series of quality and performance tests. Only then can a product feature the THX Select logo, which is your guarantee that the Home Theatre products you purchase will give you superb performance for many years to come. THX Select requirements cover every aspect of the product including power amplifier and pre-amplifier performance and operation, and hundreds of other parameters in both the digital and analog domain. ■ Re-Equalization The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively bright and harsh when played back over audio equipment in the home because film soundtracks were designed to be played back in large movie theatres using very different professional equipment. Re-Equalization restores the correct tonal balance for watching a movie soundtrack in a small home environment. ■ Timbre Matching The human ear changes our perception of a sound depending on the direction from which the sound is coming. In a movie theatre, there is an array of surround speakers so that the surround information is all around you. In a home theatre, you use only two speakers located to the side of your head. The Timbre Matching feature filters the information going to the surround speakers so that they more closely match the tonal characteristics of the sound coming from the front speakers. This ensures seamless panning between the front and surround speakers. ■ Adaptive Decorrelation THX Surround EX - Dolby Digital Surround EX is a joint development of Dolby Laboratories and the THX Ltd. In a movie theater, film soundtracks that have been encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology are able to reproduce an extra channel which has been added during the mixing of the program. This channel, called Surround Back, places sounds behind the listener in addition to the currently available front left, front center, front right, surround right, surround left and subwoofer channels. This additional channel provides the opportunity for more detailed imaging behind the listener and brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound localization than ever before. Movies that were created using the Dolby Digital Surround EX technology, when released into the home consumer market may exhibit wording to that effect on the packaging. A list of movies created using this technology can be found on the Dolby web site at www.dolby.com. A list of available DVD software titles encoded with this technology can be found at www.thx.com. Only receiver and controller products bearing the THX Surround EX logo, when in the THX Surround EX mode, faithfully reproduce this new technology in the home. This product may also engage the THX Surround EX mode during the playback of 5.1 channel material that is not Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded. In such case the information delivered to the Surround Back channel will be program dependent and may or may not be very pleasing depending on the particular soundtrack and the tastes of the individual listener. ■ CINEMA DSP Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater in the listening room of your own home. 83 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION In a movie theatre, a large number of surround speakers help create an enveloping surround sound experience, but in a home theatre there are usually only two speakers. This can make the surround speakers sound like headphones that lack spaciousness and envelopment. The surround sounds will also collapse into the closest speaker as you move away from the middle seating position. Adaptive Decorrelation slightly changes one surround channel's time and phase relationship with respect to the other surround channel. This expands the listening position and creates--with only two speakers--the same spacious surround experience as in a movie theatre. ■ THX Surround EX 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 84 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM GLOSSARY ■ SILENT CINEMA ■ S VIDEO signal YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. With the S VIDEO signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S VIDEO cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. ■ PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. ■ ITU-R ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU (International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R recommends a standard speaker placement which is used in many critical listening rooms, especially for mastering purposes. ■ Composite Video signal With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed of three basic elements of a video picture; color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined. 84 ■ Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to use the component signal for output. 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 85 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS AUDIO SECTION VIDEO SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround, Surround back 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω ..................................... 110 W • Video Signal Type [U.S.A., Canada and Korea models] ................................... NTSC [Other models] ............................................................ PAL/NTSC • Maximum Power (EIAJ) [China, Asia, Korea and General models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω .......................................................... 165 W • Signal to Noise Ratio .............................................................. 50 dB • Dynamic Power (IHF) [U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia, Asia, Korea and General models] 8/6/4/2 Ω ........................................................ 145/185/240/320 W • DIN Standard Output Power [U.K. and Europe models] 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω .........................................................170 W • IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models] 1 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω ....................................................... 125 W • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Composite, S-Video ................................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB Component ............................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB FM SECTION • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Asia and General model] ......... 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz [Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • Usable Sensitivity (IHF)........................................ 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf) • Damping Factor (IHF) 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω................................................... 140 or more • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB • Frequency Response CD terminal to Front L/R ...................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ................................................................ 0.2%/0.3% • Total Harmonic Distortion PHONO to REC OUT (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) .................. 0.02% CD, etc. to Front L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 60 W, 8 Ω) .......... 0.04% • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 42 dB • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) PHONO (5 mV) to Front L/R [U.K., Europe and Australia models] .................................... 81 dB [Other models] ....................................................................... 86 dB CD (250 mV) to Front L/R, Effect Off ................................ 100 dB AM SECTION • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R ............................................................... 150 µV or less • Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) PHONO (terminated) to Front L/R ........................... 60 dB/55 dB CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Front L/R ....................... 60 dB/45 dB • Tone Control (Front L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ....................................................... ±6 dB/50 Hz BASS Turnover Frequency .................................................. 350 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut ................................................ ±6 dB/20 kHz TREBLE Turnover Frequency............................................ 3.5 kHz • Phones Output .......................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω • Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance PHONO .................................................................. 3.5 mV/47 kΩ CD, etc .................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz [Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz [Other models] ................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz GENERAL • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. AC 120 V/60 Hz [Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V/50 Hz [China model] ..................................................... AC 220 V/50 Hz [Korea model] .................................................... AC 220 V/60 Hz [U.K. and Europe models] ................................. AC 230 V/50 Hz [Asia and General models] AC 110/120/220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz • Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 500 W/630 VA [Other models] ................................................................... 500 W • Standby Power Consumption ................................................................................... 0.5 W or less • AC Outlets [U.S.A. and Canada models]..... 2 (Total 100 W/0.8 A maximum) [U.K. and Australia models] .............. 1 (Total 100 W maximum) [China and Europe models] ................ 2 (Total 100 W maximum) [Asia and General models] ................... 2 (Total 50 W maximum) • Dimension (W x H x D) ................................... 435 x 171 x 421 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 16-7/8”) • Weight ........................................................................ 15 kg (33 lbs) 85 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • Output Level/Output Impedance REC OUT ............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 kΩ PRE OUT ................................................................... 1.0 V/500 Ω SUBWOOFER ........................................................... 2.0 V/500 Ω ZONE 2 OUTPUT [U.S.A., Canada and Australia models].................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ ZONE 3 OUTPUT [U.S.A., Canada and Australia models]............. 200 mV/1.2 kΩ • Frequency Response ........................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz +0.5, –2 dB HTR-5790U-cv.fm Page 1 Tuesday, November 18, 2003 11:12 AM U HTR-5790 AV Receiver ©2003 YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. Printed in Malaysia WC85700 OWNER'S MANUAL-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
-
87
-
88
-
89
-
90
in andere talen
- English: Yamaha HTR-5790 User manual
- italiano: Yamaha HTR-5790 Manuale utente
- русский: Yamaha HTR-5790 Руководство пользователя
- français: Yamaha HTR-5790 Manuel utilisateur
- español: Yamaha HTR-5790 Manual de usuario
- Deutsch: Yamaha HTR-5790 Benutzerhandbuch
- português: Yamaha HTR-5790 Manual do usuário
- dansk: Yamaha HTR-5790 Brugermanual
- suomi: Yamaha HTR-5790 Ohjekirja
- čeština: Yamaha HTR-5790 Uživatelský manuál
- svenska: Yamaha HTR-5790 Användarmanual
- Türkçe: Yamaha HTR-5790 Kullanım kılavuzu
- polski: Yamaha HTR-5790 Instrukcja obsługi
- română: Yamaha HTR-5790 Manual de utilizare
Gerelateerde artikelen
-
Yamaha RX-V650 Handleiding
-
Yamaha RX-550 de handleiding
-
-
-
-
-
Yamaha HTR-2067 de handleiding
-
-
-
Yamaha HTR-6280 de handleiding
